MASTER 

NEGATIVE 
NO.  95-82335-1 


COPYRIGHT  STATEMENT 


The  copyright  law  of  the  United  States  (Title  17,  United  States  Code) 
governs  the  making  of  photocopies  or  other  reproductions  of  copyrighted 
materials  including  foreign  works  under  certain  conditions.  In  addition, 
the  United  States  extends  protection  to  foreign  works  by  means  of 
various  international  conventions,  bilateral  agreements,  and 
prock^milipns. 

Under  certain  conditions  specified  in  the  law,  libraries  and  archives  are 
authorized  to  furnish  a  photocopy  or  other  reproduction.  One  of  these 
specified  conditions  is  that  the  photocopy  or  reproduction  is  not  to  be 
"used  for  any  purpose  other  than  private  study,  scholarship,  or  research." 
If  a  user  makes  a  request  for^  or  later  uses,  a  photocopy  or  reproduction 
for  purposes  in  excess  of  "fair  use,"  that  user  may  be  liable  for  copyright 
infringement. 

The  Columbia  University  Libraries  reserve  the  right  to  refuse  to  accept  a 
copying  order  if,  in  its  judgement,  fulfillment  of  the  order  would  involve 
violation  of  the  copyright  law. 


Author: 


W.B.  Conkey  Company 


Title: 


What  a  business  man 
should  know  about... 

Place: 

Chicago 

Date: 

1922.  [1921] 


^Co -572.55-  1 


MASTER  NEQATIVE  • 


COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES 
PRESERVATION  DIVISION 

BIBLIOGRAPHIC  MICROFORM  TARGET 


ORIGINAL  MATERIAL  AS  FILMED  •  EXISTING  BIBLIOGRAPHIC 


RESTRICTIONS  ON  USE: 


lasltieff 

366* 


Conkey,  W.  B.,  company,  Chicago. 

What  a  business  man  shonld  know  abont  printing  and 
bookmaMng.  Bev.  ed.  A  book  for  ready  reference  ... 
'  md  (etc.]  W.  B.  Conkey  company,  ISStj^g 

3  p.  1..  g  IM  f,   front  (port)  illus.,  plates^  foUL  diagr.  191' 


TECHNICAL  MICROFORM  DATA 


REDUCTION  RATIO: 


12i 


IMAGE  PLACEMENT:  lA  iHAi  IB 


DATE  FILMED: 


INITIALS: 


Vy|.\Al 


TRACKING  « : 


HLMED  BY  PRESERVATION  RESOURCES.  BETHLEHEM.  PA. 


BIBLIOGRAPHIC  IRREGULARITIES 

MAIN  ENTRY:  W.  B.  Conkey  Company 


W!1t1!  i  fuiaiaf    "^ann  should  know  about,,. 


Bibliographic  Irrequlgrities  in  the  Original  Document: 

List  ail  volumes  and  pages  affected;  include  name  of  institution  if  filming  borrowed  text. 


 Page(s)  missing/not  available:  

__Volume(s)  missing/not  available:  

 ^illegible  and/or  damaged  page(s):_  

 ^Page(s)  or  voiume(s)  misnumbered:  

 Bound  out  of  sequence:  

X  Page(s)  or  volume(s)  filmed  from  copy  borrowed  from:  Columbia  University 

entire  book  

 Other:  


TRACKING#:  MSH03036 


FILMED  IN  WHOLE 
OR  PART  FROM  A 
COPY  BORROWED 


COLUMBIA 
UNIVERSITY 


INTENTIONAL 
SECOND  EXPOSURES 

DUE  TO 
PHOTOGRAPHS  OR 
FADE  CHANGES 


o 

o 


^1 


^>5 


3 
3 


O 


o  m 


^^^^^ 

C!  Cll 


in 
O 

1 
i 


8 

i 
i 


to 

Oi 


O 


1.0  mm 


1.5  mm 


2.0  mm 


ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 
at)cclef8hijklinnopqrstuvwxyzl234567B90 


ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 
abcde^ijklrTinopqrsttJVW]^l234567890 


ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 
abcdefghij  kl  mnopqrstu  vwxyz 
1234567890 


ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 
2.5  mm  1234567890 


'A 


4.- 


■miiU 


o 
o 

Tj  in  u 

35  TJ  ^ 

>  C  Cd 

S  O  09 

0(0  5 

m 

0 


6^ 


■■■i 

IliilililH 


Columbia  WLnii)tviitv 

in  tbc  Ctti^  of  jAtlo  JDinrii 

SCHOOL  OF  UBRARY  SERVICp 


What  a  Business  Man  Should  Know 


■ 

Bookmaking 


W-  B.  CONKEY 

Prmidrntt  The  W.  B.  dmkey  Cmnpimy 


What  a  Business  Man  Should 
Ejiow  About  Printing 
and  Bookmaking 


A  Book  for  Ready  Reference 


Price  One  Dollar 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CMcago  Hammond  New  York 

im 


W.  B.  CONKEY 

President  The  W.  B.  Conkey  Company 


What  a  Business  Man  Should 
Know  About  Printing 


Rmised  Edition 


A  Baok  for  Ready  Reference 


Price  One  Dollar 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

Chksago  Hammond  New  York 

1922 


Copyright 
1921 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


All  Rights  Reserved 


W.  B.  Conkey  Company 

Printers  and  Binders 


General  Offices  and  Works 

Hammond,  Indiana 

Telephone  South  Chicago  1445-6 


Chicago  Offices :    Fine  Arts  Building 

Telephone  Wabash  2931 


New  York  Offices :    Metropolitan  Life  Building 
Telephone  Ashland  1191 


Gspyright 

1921 

V.  a  CONKEY  COMPANY 


AU  Rights  Reserved 


;  MtnoLBa  or  th^  eormiaHT 
^  VMS  nuMUHtmeiui  asmisuo 

BWMT  tt.  fl»t« 


W.  B.  Conkey  Company 

Printers  and  Binders 


General  Offices  and  Works 
Hammond,  Indiana 

Telephone  South  Chicago  1445-6 


Qmmgo  Offices :    Fine  Arts  Building 

Telqphone  Wabash  2931 


New  York  Offices :    Metropolitan  Life  Building 
Telephone  Ashland  1191 


FOREWORD 


THIS  work  is  not  a  text-book,  and  we  offer  no  apok>- 
gies  lor  treating  many  subjects  in  a  greatly  con* 
densed  form.  Our  object  has  hem  to  cover  such  items 
as  are  not  generally  treated,  and  to  do  so  briefly  and  to 
the  point.  There  are  many  details  of  a  specific  nature 
covered  in  books  on  those  particular  subjects  which  we 
have  omitted,  as  well  as  of  ^e  common  rtdes  and  formu- 
las so  well  understood  as  to  make  their  repetition  ^bso- 
lutely  superfluous. 

The  information  contained  in  this  book  on  Punctua- 
tion, Quotations,  Abbreviations,  the  Use  of  Figures, 
Italics,  etc.,  were  obtained  from  some  of  the  most  authori- 
tative sources,  among  which  are  **A  Manual  for  Writers" 
(by  Prof.  John  Matthews  Manley,  head  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  English  in  the  University  of  Chicago,  and  John 
A.  Powell),  "A  Manual  of  Style,"  issued  by  the  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Press,  and  "The  Manual  of  Printing," 
published  by  the  Inland  Printer  Company. 

The  technical  information  in  relation  to  copyrights, 
proof-reading,  paper,  engravings,  electrotyping,  halftone 
making,  color  plates,  etc.,  has  been  obtained,  where  neces- 
sary,  from  the  most  reliable  and  authentic  sources,  and 
will  be  found  to  be  particularly  valuable  in  giving  the 
layman  an  insight  into  "What  a  business  man  should 
know  about  printing  and  book-making." 

Some,  in  fact  much,  that  we  offer  in  this  connection 
is  of  an  elementary  character,  and  will  doubtless  appeal 


most  to  the  new  beginner,  but  our  long  years  of  expe- 
rience show  a  lack,  and  therefore  the  need,  of  just  such 
things  as  are  here  presented.  We  indulge  in  the  hope, 
however,  that  many  others  ah-eady  familiar  with  all 
angles  of  Writing  and  Compiling  as  well  as  Catalog  and 
Book  Building  will  find  this  book  a  source  of  valuable 
information  for  convenient  reference. 

Last,  but  by  no  means  least,  we  desire  to  convey  a 
mtssage  to  our  patrons  concemii^  our  institution  and 
oiganizatioQ,  which  we  believe  is  unsurpassed  anywhere, 
and  to  give  assurance  of  our  ability  and  desire  to  render 
a  genuine  service — complete  satisfaction. 

W.  B.  CONKEY  C6MPANY. 


Fftge  10 


How  We  Came  to  Build  a  Plant  in  the 
Country  md  Selected  Hammond 

By  W.  B.  GONKBY 

WE  all  have  an  ideal,  and  after  having  operated  a  print- 
ing and  binding  plant  in  Chicago  for  twenty  years 
prior  to  1897,  in  the  two  large  buildings  which  we  built  and 
equipped,  I  became  impressed  with  the  idea  that  a  print- 
ing and  binding. business  could  be  run  under  very  different 
conditions  and  surroundings  than  existed  in  the  most 
congested  quarters  of  a  large  city. 

If  there  is  an  inanimate  object  that  possesses  a  living 
soul,  it  is  a  book;  and  my  thought  was  that  the  birth  of 
this  book  into  life  should  be  under  the  most  perfect  and 
beautiful  surroundings,  and  this  motive  was  tiie  basis  of 
our  action  in  building  our  plant. 

With  this  thought  thoroughly  in  mind,  the  details  and 
plans  of  an  ideal  institution  were  worked  out  with  the 
assistance  of  Mr.  George  C.  Nimmons,  the  famous  archi- 
tect, the  success  of  which  has  beeii  demonstrated  during 
the  twenty-three  years  we  have  been  located  in  Hammond. 

The  smells  from  the  alleys;  the  tremendous  heat  of 
the  city  streets  in  summer;  the  constant  rumble  and 
noise  of  passing  vehicles  and  street  cars;  the  long  dis- 
tances necessary  for  employees  to  get  to  their  place  of 
employment;  the  dust,  soot  and  coal  smoke  that  was 
continually  blowing  in  through  the  open  windows  in 

Page  11 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

UAMMOHD  NEW  YQMC 


file  smmiier  time,  solliiig  the  paper,  tables  and  floors, 
as  wdl  as  tlie  hands  of  the  woricers;  the  dangerous  and 
congested  condition  of  elevators  transporting  commodities 
from  one  floor  to  another,  with  the  incessant  delays ;  the 
narrow,  dark  stairways;  the  large  floors  through  which 
the  daylight  never  penetrated  over  thirty  feet  from  win- 
dows on  each  side,  necessitating  the  use  of  artificial  light 
in  the  center  of  all  workrooii»;  as  well  as  the  fearful 
jeopardy  to  human  life  by  fire  in  these  large  buildings, 
caused  me  to  believe  that  a  diflPerent  condition  of  things 
could  be  created  by  building  a  large  plant  in  the  country 
under  proper  conditions. 

The  question  of  location  was  an  inqKMrtant  one,  and 
munmond  was  sdected  because  of  its  dose  proximity  to 
Chicago,  its  wonderful  railroad  and  transportation  facili- 
ties, and  the  fact  of  its  being  a  great  labor  center  because 
of  the  iron  and  steel  mills  in  the  immediate  vicinity,  that 
used  principally  man  labor  and  furnishing  no  particular 
work  for  female  labor.  The  community  in  the  immediate 
vicinity  was  thoroughly  canvassed  and  found  to  contain 
the  nodeus  for  bindery  girb  who  could  be  educated,  and 
youi^  men  and  boys  who  could  be  taught  the  trades  of 
printii^  and  bookbinding. 

The  safety  of  the  hundreds  of  human  lives  while 
employed  by  us  was  a  responsibility  which  I  never  lost 
sight  of  for  a  moment,  and  it  was  therefore  our  endeavor 
to  find  scmie  way  that  their  lives  would  not  be  endangered 
whie  enafkfytd  by  our  Cbmpaiiy,  and  that  thdr  comfort 
and  happiness  codd  be  constantly  promoted  by^ 

13 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKACO  HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


and  surroundings  which  could  be  created  in  a  manu- 
facturing plant. 

In  order  to  prevent  accidents,  individual  motors  were 
installed  on  all  machines,  thus  doing  away  with  dangerous 
line  shafting  and  overhead  belts,  which  cause  no  end  of 
acddents  in  large  plants.  The  wisdom  of  our  action  has 
been  proven  by  the  ahnost  entire  elimination  of  accidents. 

The  windows  surrounding  the  entire  buildii^  were 
placed  two  and  one-half  feet  above  the  floor  so  that  in 
case  of  panic  the  employees  could  easily  get  out  of  the 
windows  anywhere  into  the  park  surrounding  the  building. 

Prior  to  constructing  the  building,  a  floor  plan  was 
drawn  and  small  pieces  of  cardboard  were  cut  out  to  the 
scale  size  of  each  machine,  and  the  machines  in  all  depart- 
ments were  placed  on  this  plan,  showing  the  exact  space 
required  for  each  machine,  the  space  surrounding  them, 
the  aisles,  lavatories  and  all  necessary  equipment  going 
into  the  building.  This  plan  was  studied  and  changed 
until  a  perfect  layout  was  created,  so  that  the  making  of 
a  book  should  progress  like  a  flowing  river  until  the 
finished  product  landed  in  the  shipping  room.  This 
layout  has  never  been  materially  changed,  and  it  is  today 
acknowledged  by  production  engineers  as  one  of  the  most 
perfectly  laid  out  plants  in  America. 

In  order  that  there  might  be  a  constant  supply  of  pure 
and  fresh  air,  immense  air  ducts  were  constructed  under- 
neath the  building,  the  main  duct  being  18  feet  wide  and 
6  feet  deep,  with  brandies  in  all  directions,  to  which  two 
25-foot  Sturtevant  blower  fans  were  connected,  ii^ch  in 

13 


3skm>m 


W.       CONKEY  COMPANY 

CnCACb  HMMOND  NEW  YORK 


winter  draw  fresh  air  from  large  windows  in  the  fan 
room,  over  superheated  steam  pipes,  thus  constantly 
pumping  fresh  warm  air  into  the  building,  and  in  sum- 
mer drawing  the  air  over  chilled  pipes  to  cod  the  build- 
it^  to  a  proper  woridng  temperattire. 

The  i»%vailiqg  winds  in  the  stnnmer-time  are  from 
the  south,  southeast  and  southwest,  and  inasmuch  as  the 
windows  in  the  saw-tooth  roof  are  open  for  ventilation 
during  working  hours,  and  it  is  our  particular  purpose 
to  eliminate  dust,  smoke  and  dirt,  the  engines,  heating 
and  boiler  plant,  and  the  smokestacks  were  placed  on 
the  north  side  of  the  building,  so  that  the  prevailing 
winds  would  blow  the  smoke  away  from  the  building 
instead  of  over  it 

Mr.  O.  C.  Simons,  one  of  America's  most  famous 
landscape  gardeners,  was  employed  to  lay  out  the  park, 
constructing  its  graveled  walks  and  planting  the  trees  and 
shrubs,  which  by  constant  care  have  developed  into  a 
most  beautiful  surrounding  for  the  plant. 

A  lake,  200  feet  long,  50  to  75  feet  in  width,  and  18 
to  20  feet  deep,  was  constructed  in  the  center  of  the 
park,  adding  materially  to  its  beauty.  The  water  in  this 
lake  is  taken  from  Lake  Michigan,  600,000  gallons,  and 
furnishes  the  supply  for  our  sprinkler  system,  toilets  and 
lavatories  in  the  building. 

Over  the  enfxaoce  to  Ac  office,  overlooking  the  park, 
which  occupies  the  front  part  of  the  building,  is  a  large 
plaifue,  which  is  our  imprint,  or  printers'  mark,  the 
design  represents  Pegasus,  the  mythical  Winged  Horse 

P^e  14 


4 


/ffV^'ri  1"!  1 

w. 

B.  CONKEY 

COMPANY 

mi 

CHICAGO 

HAMMOND 

HEW  vmK 

of  Literature,  with  the  Tricolor  of  Chicago,  bearii^  the 
emblems  of  the  printer's  art — ^the  graver's  tool,  ink  balls 
and  palette  on  either  side  of  the  plaque,  with  the  name 
W.  B.  CoNKEY  Company,  Chicago,  forming  the  crown. 
It  was  designed  by  Frank  X.  Lyndecker,  the  famous  artist, 
and  was  modeled  in  day  by  Lorado  Taf  t,  the  celebrated 
sculptor. 

During  the  summer-time  there  is  no  more  beautiful 
sight  than  to  see  the  thousand  or  more  of  our  employees 
stretched  on  the  lawns  enjoying  their  lunches  under  the 
shade  of  the  trees. 

In  order  to  accomplish  this  idea  it  was  necessary  in  a 
measure  to  change  the  character  of  our  business  from 
what  it  was  twenty-three  years  ago,  which  has  been  done. 
My  belief  was  that  it  was  not  necessary  for  a  customer 
to  have  his  books  made  immediately  across  the  road  from 
his  business,  any  more  than  it  was  necessary  for  his  shoes 
or  other  articles  to  be  made  under  his  supervision.  The 
point  was  to  inspire  the  customer  with  the  confidence  that 
his  work  would  be  absolutely  right  and  to  his  satisfaction, 
and  the  business  would  then  come. 

This  thought  has  been  verified  by  the  fact  that  our 
business  has  been  successful  and  constantly  increasing, 
until  today  our  list  of  customers  includes  nearly  all  the 
leading  publishers  of  the  country,  and  our  plant  has  grown 
to  cover  an  area  of  over  600,000  square  feet,  filled  with 
the  latest  and  best  machinery  of  every  kmd  known  in 
the  art  of  printing  and  bookbinding,  with  a  corps  of  em- 
ployees who  are  faithful  and  loyal,  with  heads  of  depart- 

Page  15 


Si 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 
omam               imidiond               new  yoric 

ments,  executives  and  managers  who  have  been  sdected 
for  their  ability  and  knowledge  of  the  biisiiiess,  all  of 
whom  are  stiockholders  in  the  Company,  so  that  the  ideal 
of  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  century  ago  has  become  a  realized 
facta 


Page  16 


THE  CONKEY  ORGANIZATION, 

EQUIPMENT  AND  FACILITIES  FOR 
SERVING  OUR  PATRONS,  AND 
HOW  WE  DO  IT 


CHICAGO 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


HAMMOND 


NEW  YORK 


The  Gonkey  Organization,  Bquipnieiit  and 
Facilities  for  Serving  Our  Patrons, 
and  How  We  Do  It 


THE  plant  of  the  W.  B.  Conkey  Company  is  located  in 
a  park  of  about  twenty  acres,  in  Hammond,  which  is 
the  northern  boundary  of  Lake  Comity,  Indiana,  and 
adjoins  Cook  County,  or  Chicago,  so  that  the  two  cities 
adjoin,  with  a  distance  of  twenty  miles  from  the  build- 
ings of  the  W.  B.  Conkey  Company  to  the  courthouse 
in  the  center  of  Chicago. 

We  have  fourteen  trunk  line  railroads  passing  through 
Hammond,  south  and  east,  and  every  train  coming  into 
Chicago,  either  from  the  south  or  east,  must  pass  through 
Hammond,  as  well  as  the  three  belt  lines  which  circle 
Chicago,  thus  giving  Hammond  the  greatest  possible 
shipping  facilities. 

A  street  car  line  runs  from  the  plant  directly  to  the 
center  of  Chicago,  passing  through  the  marvelous  indus- 
trial distrkts  of  East  Chicago,  Indiana  Harbor,  and 
Whiting  on  the  right,  and  Pullman,  West  Pullman  and 
Kensington  on  the  left,  through  South  Chicago  and  the 
great  residential  portion  of  the  South  Side  of  Chicago, 
to  the  heart  of  the  city,  thus  making  easy  access  for 
transportation  from  the  homes  in  these  communities  of 
such  e3ctra  labor  as  we  may  require. 


LOCATION 


Fige  19 


W.  B.  CONK£Y  COIiPAHY 

CSaCtfiO                    BAMMOHD                     MEIf  YOK 

BUILDINGS 


The  buildings  were  constructed  on  a  plan  originated 
by  our  President,  Mr.  W.  B.  Conkey,  after  many  years' 
experience  in  buildings  constructed  by  him  in  Qiicago, 
which  were  the  osml  tqp-to-date  printiiig  offices;  but  our 
present  btitldiiigs  were  biiilt  on  one  floor,  covering  an 
area  of  nearfy  twelve  acres ;  they  are  built  of  brick,  sted 
and  glass,  with  concrete  floors  and  saw-tooth  roofs;  the 
buildings  are  placed  to  the  absolute  points  of  the  compass, 
with  the  openings  in  the  roof  to  the  north,  thus  admitting 
to  the  piant  only  the  north  light,  which  is  the  artist's  light, 
permitting  no  direct  sonrays  to  appear  in  the  building; 
liitts  otn-  light  is  uniform  on  dark  days  as  well  as  bright. 

All  successful  photograph  studios  have  always  been 
built  to  admit  only  the  north  light  in  order  to  assure  per- 
fection in  color  and  tmif  orm  light  conditions,  whidi  are 
so  necessary  for  workmen  operating  in  the  printing  and 
book-snaking  bissiness. 

Every  convenience  for  the  proper  conduct  of  the  busi- 
ness has  been  utilized  in  the  construction  of  the  buildings, 
including  light,  sanitation  and  pure  air. 

The  toilets  are  arranged  within  easy  access  of  not  to 
ea^ceed  one  hundred  feet  from  every  employee,  and  lava- 
tories are  pheed  in  the  most  convenient  i^aces  for  quick 
access  througlioot  the  worknxnns. 

The  washrooms  are  equipped  with  full  size  lockers 
for  the  convenience  of  all,  and  there  is  a  dining-room 
where  meals  are  served  at  a  moderate  price. 

Pkge  20 


BUILDINGS 


The  buildings  were  constructed  on  a  plan  originated 
by  our  President,  Mr.  W.  B.  Conkey,  after  many  years* 
experience  in  buildings  constructed  by  him  in  Chicago, 
which  were  the  usual  up-to-date  printing  offices;  but  our 
present  buildings  were  built  on  one  floor,  covering  an 
area  of  nearly  twelve  acres ;  they  are  built  of  brick,  steel 
and  glass,  with  concrete  floors  and  saw-tooth  roofs;  the 
buildings  are  placed  to  the  absolute  points  of  the  compass, 
with  the  openings  in  the  roof  to  the  north,  thus  admitting 
to  the  plant  only  the  north  light,  which  is  the  artist's  light, 
permitting  no  direct  sunrays  to  appear  in  the  building; 
thus  our  light  is  uniform  on  dark  days  as  well  as  bright. 

All  successful  photograph  studios  have  always  been 
built  to  admit  only  the  north  light  in  order  to  assure  per- 
fection in  color  and  uniform  light  conditions,  which  are 
80  necessary  for  workmen  operating  in  the  printing  and 
book-making  business. 

Every  convenience  for  the  proper  conduct  of  the  busi- 
ness has  been  utilized  in  the  construction  of  the  buildings, 
including  light,  sanitation  and  pure  air. 

The  toilets  are  arranged  within  easy  access  of  not  to 
exceed  one  hundred  feet  from  every  employee,  and  lava- 
tories are  placed  in  the  most  convenient  places  for  quick 
access  throughout  the  workrooms. 

The  washrooms  are  equipped  with  full  size  lockers 
for  the  convenience  of  all,  and  there  is  a  dining-room 
where  meals  are  served  at  a  moderate  price. 
Face  20 


f4P! 

m 

W.  B,  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKACO                      HAMMOND                       NEW  HmK 

Employees  are  admitted  to  the  building  through  sep- 
arate entrances,  one  for  the  men  and  another  for  the 
women,  so  that  the  sexes  are  absolutely  separated  at  all 
times,  the  men  having  their  dining  and  rest  rooms  on 
their  side  of  the  building,  and  the  women  their  dining 
and  rest  rooms  adjacent  to  their  entrance.  Lockers  and 
lavatories  are  provided  so  that  every  convenience  for 
their  comfort  has  been  thoroughly  thought  out  and  cared 
for.  In  the  reading  and  rest  rooms  of  both  departments 
all  the  current  magazines  are  provided,  and  in  the  women's 
department  a  piano  and  Victrola  with  ample  room  for 
dmicing  and  recreation  during  the  time  they  are  not 
employed  at  their  regular  work. 

The  crowded  conditions  which  are  manifest  in  other 
plants  are  not  present  in  our  buildings— every  employee 
has  ample  space  in  which  to  perform  his  or  her  work, 
with  broad  aisles  that  are  always  kept  free  and  dear. 

WAREHOUSES 

Ample  paper  and  book  storage  warehouses  are  built 
adjacent  to,  and  are  a  part  of  the  main  buildings,  being 
all  on  the  ground  floor.  They  are  light  and  airy,  with 
broad  aisles  and  high  ceilings,  fully  equipped  with  auto- 
matic sprinklers,  and  the  rate  of  insurance  covering  these 
warehouses,  as  well  as  contents  of  cars  in  our  freight 
yard,  is  the  same  as  on  the  balance  of  our  property — 
seven  cents  per  hundred  dollars. 

It  is  not  an  uncommon  thing  for  us  to  have  fifty  to 

ftige  23 


W.        CONKEY  COMPANY 

CWayBO  HAMMOND 

Mxty  carloads  of  paper,  as  w«il  as  between  two  and  three 
milUon  books  stored  iot  oar  costomers.  .    .  „ 

The  warehouses  open  into  the  Recoving  and  Shipp«ng 
departments,  so  that  paper  and  books  can  be  handled  and 
shipped  with  the  minimum  of  expense. 

The  Cbnkey  Belt  Line  connects  the  Monon,  Ene  ana 
Bdt  railroads  with  our  own  freight  yard.  Sidetracks 
go  to  eadi  bonding,  thus  allowing  loading  and  unloading 
direct  to  shipping  plaHonns. 

LOCATION  OF  DEPARTMENTS 

The  location  of  the  different  departments  has  been 
made  so  that  there  is  strict  continuity  in  the  manufacture 
of  onr  product  For  instance,  the  paper  is  received  m 
the  warehouse  on  Ae  north  side  of  the  building.  From 
there  this  paper  is  taken  to  the  Seasoning  Room,  where 
it  is  opened  up,  laid  out  flat  on  trucks,  ready  to  be  mwed 
to  fl»e  Pressroom  when  it  is  required  for  pnntn«.  After 
the  sheets  are  printed  they  are  taken  in  regular  course 
to  the  Folding  Department;  after  being  folded  and  tied 

in  proper  bandies.  a«orateiy  «>««t«^,rj^„f  1 1"^' 
heaw  pressure,  they  are  taken  to  the  Folded  Stock  Room 
where  the  tips  are  mserted.  if  required  or  fnyjpecial 
work  to  be  done  on  individual  sections  is  finished;  tiien 
they  are  sent  to  the  Gathering  Department;  from  th«e 
to  &e  Collating  Department ;  then  to  the  Sewing  Depart- 
ment; then  to  the  Smashing.  Gluing,  Cuttmg  Rounding 
and  Backing,  Headbanding  and  Lining,  and  Casing-m 

Bice  24 


w. 

B.  CONKEY 

COMPANY 

CHICAGO 

HAMMOND 

NEW  YORK 

departments,  and  from  there  to  the  Inspection  Room; 
then  to  the  Bound  Stock  Warehouse;  then  to  the  Ship- 
ping Room,  which  is  immediately  adjoining  the  depart- 
ment in  which  the  paper  stock  was  received,  thus  show- 
ing that  the  entire  operation  of  the  manufacture  of  a 
book  or  catalog  is  in  one  continuous  line  without  a  back- 
lash, right  up  to  the  Shipping  Department,  and  without 
ever  having  been  taken  up  or  down  in  an  elevator,  but 
done  on  a  continuous  Hne  of  procedure,  which  means  the 
greatest  production  economy,  and  the  least  possible  loss 
or  infuiy  during  its  creation. 

MOVING  COMMODITIES 

The  system  of  moving  commodities  from  one  depart- 
ment to  another  is  operated  by  electric  motor  trucks, 
which  are  operated  on  the  one-way  system  with  railroad 
signal  semaphores  in  each  department,  and  if  commodities 
are  desired  to  be  removed  from  a  department,  a  red 
semaphore  is  thrown  up  so  that  when  the  motor  truck 
passes  this  department  the  driver  attaches  the  power 
truck  to  the  truck  containing  the  commodity,  and  it  is 
thus  removed  to  the  department  to  which  it  is  consigned. 
When  a  department  requires  an  empty  truck  a  white 
semaphore  is  shown,  and  in  the  next  round  of  the  motor 
truck  this  empty  truck  is  brought  to  the  department  re- 
questing it,  ready  to  be  loaded.  This  plan  is  not  only  a 
great  economy,  eliminating  the  necessity  of  man  power, 
but  is  of  great  assistance  in  maintaining  perfect  order 
and  system  throughout  the  plant 

25 


mi 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKAlCO                      HAMMONO                       NEW  YORK 

PAPER  STOCK 


Special  attentkm  isgiven  tothe  recdvinf  and  handling 
of  paper  stock.  When  tiie  stodc  is  received  from  the 
paper  nuH  it  is  weighed  as  it  comes  into  the  plant  and 
stored  in  the  warehouse,  and  the  bundles  accurately 
counted.  When  it  is  requisitioned  for  use,  after  being 
placed  on  trucks,  it  is  driven  across  platform  scales 
erected  for  this  pofpose,  and  again  accurately  weighed, 
after  whkh  it  goes  to  the  Seasoning  Room,  there  to  be 
opened  and  inspected  for  condition  of  paper,  color, 
weight,  hulk  and  tensile  strength.  A  percentage  of  the 
reams  is  counted  so  that  we  may  know  if  there  has  been 
any  mistake  on  the  part  of  the  mill  which  made  the  paper. 
This  care,  while  being  extraordinary,  is  absolutely  essen- 
tial to  the  customer  who  has  pakl  thousands  of  dollars  for 
large  quantities  of  paper  whk^  he  has  never  seen,  and 
knows  nothing  about  its  condition,  but  with  the  care  and 
dose  scrutiny  which  we  have  given  we  can  O.  K.  his  bill 
intelligently,  he  feeling  assured  that  the  paper  which  has 
b^W  delivered  to  us  for  his  account  has  been  carefully 
inafected  by  us,  and  that  his  interest  has  been  wdl  pro- 
tected in  our  hands. 

ROUTINE  OF  WORK 

When  we  receive  a  request  from  a  customer  to  give 
him  an  estimate  on  his  work,  this  estimate  is  very 
caief  ully  prepared  by  eiqierienGed  estimators,  who  thor- 
oughly understand  the  cost  of  production  and  all  mate- 


W.  B. 

cmcAco 

CONKEY  COMPANY 

HAMMOND                      HEff  YQKK 

rials,  and  the  estimate  is  submitted  to  the  customer  in 
very  accurate  and  correct  detail.  When  the  contract  has 
been  accepted  by  the  customer,  both  parties  thoroughly 
understand  what  is  required,  and  there  can  be  no  mistake 
or  misunderstanding  in  this  connection. 

This  contract,  with  the  estimate,  is  then  given  to  the 
Operating  Department,  which  prepares  a  full  detailed 
work  sheet,  which  is  copied  a  number  of  times,  one  for 
each  department  through  which  this  particular  job  may 
pass,  and  these  sheets  are  then  turned  over  to  our  Plan- 
ning and  Scheduling  Department,  which  finds  a  place  for 
this  job  in  the  working  schedule,  so  that  a  definite  promise 
can  be  made  for  the  completion  of  the  work,  with  the 
assurance  that  this  promise  will  be  absolutely  kept. 

The  tickets  are  then  turned  over  to  the  head  of  each 
department,  and  a  check  is  kept  each  day  of  the  progress 
of  the  job,  so  that  at  all  times  it  is  completely  under  the 
control  of  the  Planning  and  Scheduling  Department,  as 
well  as  the  Superintendent  and  the  different  foremen  who 
are  operating  upon  the  job. 

By  this  dose  attention  to  details  in  each  case,  the 
highest  point  of  efficiency  in  the  production  of  the  work 
is  maintained  at  all  times,  as  well  as  a  very  careful  scru- 
tiny of  foremanship  patrol,  which  insures  the  highest 
quality  in  the  finished  product. 

In  the  different  departments  every  machine  and  de- 
vice, as  well  as  equipment  of  every  kind,  have  been  pro- 
vided to  facilitate  high  class  production  witii  rapidity  and 
correctness. 

Bi«e  27 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKACO  HAiiMOND  NEW  YOBK 

COMPOSITION 


The  Foremen,  Lmtoype  and  Monotype  Operators, 
Compositors  and  Proof-readers  are  skilled  and  expe- 
rienced workmen,  and  tliey  all  realize  the  lull  resp<msi- 
bility  of  the  work  entrusted  to  them,  and  the  details  of 
accurate  and  well-balanced  composition  and  proof-reading 
are  thus  assured  to  the  customer. 

In  many  composing  rooms  the  customer  feels  the 
necessity  of  stancUng  ofver  his  woik  to  see  that  it  comes 
out  to  his  satisfaction.  This  is  really  not  the  case— 4he 
customer  is  sending  his  experienced  man  to  the  OMnpos- 
ing  room  to  aid  and  help  inefficient  workmen  to  do  the 
thing  which  should  be  done,  without  wasting  the  cus- 
tomer's time  and  preventing  him  from  attending  to  his 
kgitimate  business.  In  other  words,  he  is  furnishing  a 
foreman  for  the  prii^  to  strengthen  an  incompetent 
workman,  which  does  not  have  to  he  done  in  our  insti- 
tution. 

We  follow  the  customer's  instructions  and  his  pre- 
pared copy,  and  if  this  copy  is  not  fully  understood  it  is 
taken  up  with  the  customer  and  fully  understood  by  us 
before  proceeding  with  the  work,  without  wasting  the 
customer's  time. 

ELECTROTYPING 

In  the  Electrotyping  Department  special  attention  is 
given  to  molding  and  finishing  the  plates,  as  well  as  the 
copper  shdl  on  ^  plate,  which,  on  all  plates  made  by  us. 


1  iii^£X'/i'I 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO                      HAMMOND                       NEW  YORK 

is  from  ten  to  thirteen  one-thousandths  of  an  inch  in 
thkkness,  and  which  is  far  heavier  than  the  usual  plate 
which  is  furnished  by  the  average  commercial  electro- 
typer.  Almost  the  entire  production  of  our  Electrotype 
Foundry  is  printed  in  our  own  plant,  and  our  electro- 
typers  realize  the  necessity  of  well  molded  and  finished 
plates,  and  the  need  of  actual  micrometric  thickness  of  the 
plate  to  facilitate  the  make-ready  on  the  presses,  as  it 
is  far  more  economical  to  have  these  plates  accurately 
and  correctly  made  in  the  foundry,  thus  saving  a  great 
deal  of  time  in  the  pressroom,  besides  producing  vastly 
superior  work. 

CARE  OF  THE  PLATES 

After  the  finished  plates  leave  the  Electrotype  Foun- 
dry they  are  turned  over  to  the  Plate  Room,  where  com- 
petent men  place  them  either  in  vaults  or  specially 
prepared  racks  until  they  are  ready  for  the  press.  In 
this  Plate  Room  special  attention  is  given  to  the  care  of 
plates,  and  after  an  edition  has  been  printed  from  them 
ihey  are  returned  to  this  room,  where  the  plates  are 
placed  in  wire  receptacles  and  dipped  into  boiling  lye  to 
allow  any  particles  of  ink  to  be  dissolved  from  the  surface 
of  the  plates,  after  which  they  are  placed  on  a  rack  in- 
dividually and  subjected  to  a  live  steam  pressure  of  140 
pounds,  thus  absolutely  cleaning  the  plates  of  every 
particle  of  dirt  and  bringing  the  copper  back  to  its 
original  luster  when  it  left  the  Electrotype  Foundry. 

Pkie  29 


CiOCACO 

L  CONKEY  COMPANY 

HAMMOND                        NEW  YORK 

Tliese  plates  are  then  Inspected,  and  if  any  breaks 
are  lotind«  or  unusual  wear,  they  are  immediatdy  re- 
paired before  being  put  away,  thus  assuring  the  cus- 
tomer that  his  plates  are  in  perfect  condition,  awaiting 
the  next  edition  to  go  to  press. 


For  pktes  that  are  not  in  active  senrice,  we  have  a 
large  concrete  vault  that  is  absolutely  fireproof,  wherein 
plates  can  be  stored  indefinitely.  This  vault  is  equipped 
with  automatic  sprinklers,  so  that  should  a  fire  occur 
among  the  wooden  boxes  containing  the  plates,  the 
^rinklers  would  act  immediately,  thus  making  this  room 
as  abadutdy  fireproof  as  it  is  possible  to  be. 

Our  business  is  sufficiently  lai|;e  to  have  a  complete 
organization  of  skilled  men  who  do  nothing  but  handle 
book  plates,  and  these  plates  when  received  from  the 
publisher  are  thoroughly  inspected  and  cataloged  and 
placed  in  cabinets  so  that  they  can  be  found  at  a  moment's 
notioe,  tiius  saving  the  usual  delay  occurring  in  printing 
offices  where  iie  |4ates  are  filed  in  boxes  indiscriminately, 
and  In  order  to  get  any  given  signature  a  large  amount 
of  time  is  wasted,  which  is  expensive  to  the  customer. 

By  our  method  of  handling  plates  any  customer  can 
go  into  our  plate  vault  and  find  any  individual  plate 
required  as  quickly  as  he  can  select  a  book  from  his 

tvwu  lllMilXjr. 


Tliese  plates  are  tliai  inspected,  and  if  any  Inreaks 
arc  fotmd,  or  unusual  wear,  they  are  immediately  re- 
paired before  being  put  away,  thus  assuring  the  cus- 
tomer that  his  plates  are  in  perfect  condition,  awaiting 
the  next  edition  to  go  to  press. 

PLATE  ROOM 

For  plates  that  arc  not  in  active  service,  we  have  a 
large  concrete  vault  that  is  absolutely  fireproof,  wherein 
plates  can  be  stored  indefinitely.  This  vault  is  equipped 
with  automatic  sprinklers,  so  that  should  a  fire  occur 
among  the  wooden  boxes  containing  the  plates,  the 
^rinklers  would  act  immediately,  thus  making  this  room 
as  absolutely  fireproof  as  it  is  possible  to  be. 

Our  business  is  sufficiently  large  to  have  a  complete 
organization  of  skilled  men  who  do  nothing  but  handle 
book  plates,  and  these  plates  when  received  from  the 
publisher  are  thoroughly  inspected  and  cataloged  and 
placed  in  cabinets  so  that  they  can  be  found  at  a  moment's 
notice,  thus  saving  the  usual  delay  occurring  in  printing 
offices  where  the  plates  are  filed  in  boxes  indiscriminately, 
and  in  order  to  get  any  given  signature  a  large  amount 
of  time  is  wasted,  which  is  expensive  to  the  customer. 

By  our  method  of  handling  plates  any  customer  can 
go  into  our  plate  vault  and  find  any  individual  plate 
required  as  qoiddy  as  he  can  select  a  book  from  his 
own  library. 


cHiaico 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


KAIIMOND 


NEW  YORK 


LOCK-UP  ROOM 


The  Plate  Lock-up  Room  immediately  adjoins  the 
Plate  Storage  Room,  and  the  men  who  make  up  these 
forms  do  nothing  else  but  this  particular  work.  They 
arc,  therefore,  expert  in  the  handling  of  plates  and  f orms* 
and  absolute  accuracy  is  assured  as  to  margins,  line-up 
of  pages,  and  all  the  details  which  go  to  make  a  perfectly 
imposed  form,  ready  for  the  presses. 

In  the  Lock-up  Room  we  have  thousands  of  metal 
base  blocks,  so  that  we  are  in  a  position  to  put  any  num- 
ber of  forms  to  press,  as  occa^on  requires,  using  metal 
bases  for  all  forms,  thus  insuring  rigidity  and  accuracy 
in  printing  that  cannot  be  accomplished  by  the  use  of 
any  other  material  in  connection  with  printing  from  the 
electrotype  plate. 

When  a  book  is  to  be  printed,  the  number  of  forms 
for  the  day's  run  is  taken  out  of  the  Plate  Room  and 
sent  to  the  presses  on  trucks  specially  constructed  for 
this  purpose,  and  as  soon  as.  these  plates  are  printed 
they  are  immediately  returned  to  the  Plate  Room  for 
cleaning  and  examination.  Under  this  arrangement  the 
plates  are  always  subject  to  the  immediate  supervision  of 
the  person  who  has  charge  of  them,  and  it  is  his  duty 
to  see  that  they  are  returned  to  the  Plate  Room  as  soon 
as  the  form  is  Jun  off,  so.  there,  can  be  no  liability  of 
plates  being  lost  ,  or  damaged  through  carelessness. 


Page  33 


I 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO  HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


LOCK-UP  ROOM 


The  Plate  Lock-up  Room  immediately  adjoins  the 
Plate  Storage  Room,  and  the  men  who  make  up  these 
fonns  do  nothing  else  but  this  particular  work.  They 
are,  therefore,  expert  in  the  handling  of  plates  and  forms, 
and  absolute  accuracy  is  assured  as  to  margins,  line-up 
of  pages,  and  all  the  details  which  go  to  make  a  perfectly 
imposed  form,  ready  for  the  presses. 

In  the  Lock-up  Room  we  have  thousands  of  metal 
base  blocks,  so  that  we  are  in  a  position  to  put  any  num- 
ber of  forms  to  press,  as  occasion  requires,  using  metal 
bases  for  all  forms,  thus  insuring  rigidity  and  accuracy 
in  printing  that  cannot  be  accomplished  by  the  use  of 
any  other  material  in  connection  with  printing  from  the 
electrotype  plate. 

When  a  book  is  to  be  printed,  the  number  of  forms 
for  the  day's  run  is  taken  out  of  the  Plate  Room  and 
sent  to  the  presses  on  trucks  specially  constructed  for 
this  purpose,  and  as  soon  as  these  plates  are  printed 
they  are  immediately  returned  to  the  Plate  Room  for 
cleaning  and  examination.  Under  this  arrangement  the 
plates  are  always  subject  to  the  immediate  supervision  of 
the  person  who  has  charge  of  them,  and  it  is  his  duty 
to  see  that  they  are  returned  to  the  Plate  Room  as  soon 
as  the  form  is  run  off,  so  there  can  be  no  liability  of 
plates  being  lost  or  damaged  throtigh  carelessness. 


Page  33 


M 

W.  1.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

Wlmm 

PRESSROOM 


When  the  plant  was  laid  out  the  Pressroom  was 
placed  in  the  center  of  the  building,  making  it  easy  of 
access  to  and  from  all  departments,  as  it  is  really  the 
himtt  of  the  ^hxA,  inawnMch  as  emy^tmg  that  is  bound 
must  first  be  printed.  U  is  teef ore  surroimded  by  the 
Composing  Room,  Elecfrotype  Foondry,  Plate  Room, 
Paper  Stock  Room  and  General  Stores  Department  on 
one  side,  and  the  Folding  Department  and  all  Bindery 
dqMurtments  on  the  other  side.  This  construction  makes 
tile  continuity  of  woric  a  ptOfMsiye  action  right  through 
to  the  finished  bode. 

Another  important  reason  for  pladng  the  Pressroom 
in  the  center  of  the  building  was  to  prevent  static  elec- 
tricity, which  very  seriously  interferes  with  the  produc- 
tion of  good  work  on  account  of  sheets  sticking  together 
and  smutting  while  being  printed.  This  static  electricity 
is  caused  by  the  warm  and  cold  currents  of  air  meeting 
wMt  sheets  are  gvnng  throng^  the  press,  and  in  order 
to  prevent  any  cold  currents  of  air  getting  into  the  Press- 
room it  was  placed  in  the  center  of  the  building,  with  at 
least  one  hundred  feet  of  warm  air  space  all  around  the 
Pressroom,  which  prevents  cold  air  from  striking  the 
sheets  c»£  paper  during  the  printing. 

This  static  dectridty  is  further  prevented  by  all  pi4>er 
stodc  beii^  opened  out  and  laid  flat  on  trucks  in  the 
Seasoning  Room  at  least  twenty-four  hours,  and  often- 
times much  longer,  in  order  to  get  it  to  the  same  tempera^ 

FiiSe  34 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO  HAMMOND  NEW  YQUC 


ture  as  building  before  it  is  sent  to  the  Pressroom  for 
printing. 

The  Pressroom  is  equipped  with  Miehle  presses,  with 
automatic  feeders  on  many  of  them,  and  are  all  in  thor- 
oughly first-class  shape,  there  being  no  lost  motion  in 
the  machines  so  that  there  is  the  least  possible  wear  on 
the  plates.  It  is  most  important  to  the  publisher  that 
these  plates  be  printed  on  presses  that  are  in  perfect  con- 
ditkm  so  that  the  bed  and  cylinder  work  in  perfect  har- 
mony and  all  lost  motion  eliminated. 

Many  plates  of  books  are  spoiled  through  bad  print- 
ing, which  is  caused  by  being  run  on  presses  that  are  not 
true,  as  a  slight  slurring  or  grinding  movement,  caused 
by  the  bed  and  cylinder  not  being  in  absolute  unison, 
will  grind  the  face  of  the  plate  to  such  an  extent  that 
with  a  few  editions  the  plates  will  be  so  damaged  as  to 
require  a  new  set  of  plates.  This  is  a  most  important 
factor,  because  unless  shells  are  made  when  the  composi- 
tion is  first  done,  it  means  new  composition,  which  is 
most  expensive. 

In  the  Pressroom  every  known  method  of  make- 
ready  is  used,  so  diat  this  work  can  be  done  in  the 
^rtest  possible  time,  yet  in  no  case  sacrificing  perfec- 
tion in  reproducing  the  object  to  be  printed,  or  sacrificing 
absolute  register. 

The  Pressroom  is  equipped  with  an  automatic  pro- 
duction meter  system,  to  which  the  cylinder  of  each  press 
is  attached  to  a  central  counting  machine  at  the  fore- 
man's desk.   This  is  an  entirely  separate  arrangement 

Page  35 


PI 


W.  B,  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKACO  HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


Iran  die  usual  counter  whidi  is  on  most  presses.  The 
pffDduction  meter  indicates  the  actual  running  impres- 
sions that  a  press  has  made  during  a  given  time,  regis- 
tering the  stops  and  the  omitted  sheets  caused  by  trip- 
ping the  press.  These  operations  are  all  outlined  on  a 
diait  so  that  the  foreman  at  his  desk  can  at  a  glance 
see  the  entire  operation  of  a  press  during  a  given  time, 
and  should  the  chart  register  an  unusual  condition,  he 
can  immediatdy  go  to  that  particular  press  and  ascertain 
the  trouble. 

This  is  a  rather  costly  arrangement,  but  its  value  is 
worth  the  cost  because  we  can  know  absolutely  the  num- 
ber of  sheets  printed  on  any  job,  the  aipount  of  time 
taken  to  do  the  work,  and  in  this  way  check  up  the  pro- 
duction accurately  and  poativdy  of  every  machine  in 
the  Pressroom. 


BCX)KBINDING 


Many  special  devices  originated  by  us  and  used  in 
our  plant  all  tend  to  die  perfection  of  the  finished  book. 

It  is  very  importsoA  that  a  puUisher  should  know  the 
date  upon  which  any  particular  book  has  been  printed, 

because  many  times  he  wants  to  know  the  condition  of 
his  plates  at  the  last  edition,  and  on  the  second  section 
of  the  book  printed  in  sixteens,  or  on  the  third  sixteen  of 
the  book  printed  in  thirty-twos,  you  will  find  at  the  bottom 
of  the  page  the  figure  *^ — ^May  21"  which  means  that 
diis  is  die  second  signature  of  die  book,  and  dnt  dus  • 


W,  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICACO  HAMMOND  MEW  YQUC 


i 

particular  edition  was  printed  in  May,  1921.  Every  pub- 
lisher will  realize  the  value  of  this  information.  It  is 
easy  for  us  to  do  this  because  of  the  fact  that  the  Plate 
Department  is  handled  by  a  trusted  foreman,  whose  duty 
it  is  to  see  that  this  information  is  placed  upon  every 
book  going  to  press.  He  takes  this  plate  to  the  Elec- 
trotype Dq>artment,  which  immediately  adjoins  his,  and 
the  line  is  inserted  in  the  plate. 

Having  the  Electrotype  Foundry  immediately  at  hand, 
any  corrections  can  be  made  or  damage  to  plates  repaired 
immediately,  without  any  great  amount  of  lost  time, 
which  would  be  occasioned  if  we  were  compelled  to  send 
the  plates  to  an  outside  foundry,  as  is  done  in  almost  all 
<ither  book-making  plants. 

In  every  book  will  be  found  a  collator's  mark,  which 
means  that  up  to  this  particular  stage  in  the  progress  of 
book-making  the  book  has  been  thoroughly  inspected  by 
this  collator  as  to  cleanliness  of  sheets,  position  of  inserts, 
good  printing,  accurate  folding,  etc.,  and  her  mark  means 
that  she  is  responsible  for  the  perfect  condition  of  the 
book  up  to  that  particular  stage  of  its  manufacture. 

The  Sewing,  Gluing,  Cutting,  Rounding  and  Backing, 
Headbinding  and  Lining  are  all  done  by  skilled  mechanics 
under  competent  foremen,  who  work  under  a  system  of 
foremanship  patrol,  inspecting  the  work  at  its  different 
stages  to  see  that  it  has  been  properly  and  accurately 
finished. 

He  casing-in  of  the  book  is  one  of  the  most  impor- 
tant items  in  book-making,  as  at  this  particular  stage  the 

Page  37 


IP' 

W.  B,  CONKEY  COMPANY 

"WTY^              nf^fufmnt              new  mm. 

qiwstioii  of  whether  it  is  a  good  or  a  poor  book  is  dei- 
nitely  settled.  The  fitting  of  the  case  to  the  book  itsdf » 
done  before  this  particular  stage  is  reached,  is  an  impor- 
tant one  and  is  passed  upon  by  a  master  binder,  who 
is  an  adept  at  this  work,  and  is  most  careful  that  the 
width  of  the  bade  of  llie  case  and  squares  of  the  cover 
to  the  trimmed  book  is  most  aocisratdy  fitted.  After  the 
fiaste  has  been  applied  to  the  endsheet  and  the  book 
placed  in  the  case,  right  at  this  point  all  books  manufac- 
tured by  our  Company  are  carefully  nipped  in  a  hydraulic 
press  of  our  own  invention,  so  that  no  wrinkles  will  be 
foimd  on  the  inside  of  the  cover  of  our  books.  The 
hooks  are  then  placed  between  tmiss-bound  boards  and 
pot  wider  a  proper  hydraulic  pressure  in  presses  spe- 
cially constructed,  of  our  own  invention,  in  which  rods 
are  inserted  to  hold  the  pile  of  books  under  the  same  con- 
stant pressure  as  it  received  when  in  the  hydraulic  press. 
The  press  is  then  released,  and  the  pile  of  books  is  bodily 
taken  out  of  the  press  and  taken  to  the  Book  Drying 
Room,  where  these  books  are  left  under  pressure  until 
they  are  ikorougMy  dry  and  ready  to  be  escamined  in  the 
InspectMMi  Room. 

This  is  a  most  important  item  in  book-making— that 
the  books  dry  thoroughly  under  pressure,  and  with  the 
immense  facilities  of  our  Company,  with  several  thou- 
sand brass-bound  boards  and  ample  room  for  storing  of 
seasoning  books  under  pressure,  we  are  able  to  eliminate 
Hie  senous  defect  so  often  ioond  in  books  of  the  covers 
warping  and  curling,  because  books  made  by  us  are  thor- 

Page  38 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICiWCO  muniOND  NEW  YORK 


oughly  dried  and  seasoned  before  they  are  taken  out  of 
press.  The  construction  of  the  book  can  be  hurried  in 
almost  every  department  until  it  arrives  at  this  particular 
stage  of  its  manufacture,  where  to  hurry  it  through  means 
damage  to  the  book.  If  a  freshly  varnished  automobile 
were  used  it  would  ruin  it,  and  if  a  freshly  cased-in 
book  were  used  it  would  ruin  it;  the  book  is  just  as  sure 
to  be  ruined  as  the  automiibile. 

The  next  important  thing  is  the  inspection  of  the  book, 
whidi  is  most  carefully  done,  as  we  fully  realize  that 
this  is  the  last  chance  that  we  have  to  discover  a  defect 
in  the  mechanical  part  of  our  work.  The  girls  in  this 
department  are  thoroughly  trained  to  look  out  for  defects 
that  do  creep  in,  even  under  the  most  critical  supervision, 
and  when  defective  books  are  found  they  are  sent  back 
to  the  department  in  whidi  the  defect  occurred,  and  the 
foreman  or  forewoman  of  that  department  is  informed 
of  this  particular  dereliction  of  duty  in  his  or  her  depart- 
ment, and  the  individual  who  has  made  this  error  is  in- 
formed of  it,  because  we  realize  that  although  the  foreman 
or  forewoman  of  that  department  may  have  the  best 
possible  intention  in  relation  to  the  work,  they  do  not 
actually  perform  it;  therefore  we  want  the  person  who 
actually  did  the  work  shown  the  defect,  and  in  this  way 
eliminate  the  chance  of  further  error. 

The  books  are  then  carefully  wrapped  in  packages 
and  labeled,  and  these  packages  are  made  to  look  just  as 
inviting  and  as  carefully  done  as  possible,  and  the  label 
pasted  on  accurately  and  carefully,  because  we  realize 

.  Page  ,19 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


that  the  external  appearance  of  the  package  whkh  con* 
tains  tiie  finished  product  means  a  whole  lot  toward 
nalmif  a  satisfied  and  contented  customer. 


SHIPPING  DEPARTMENT 


Special  attention  is  called  to  the  Shipping  Depart- 
ment, which  is  one  of  the  most  complete  departments  of 
onr  organiiation.  Most  of  oar  customers  soid  their 
orders  to  ns  for  diipment  to  their  customers,  and  we 
liandle  this  department  of  their  business  completely, 
checking  their  addressed  labels  which  they  send  to  us, 
checking  up  the  routing,  making  the  boxes,  seeing  that 
the  order  is  carefully  counted  and  packed,  always,  in  new 
txxxes  made  in  our  own  box  factory,  m4  properly  labeled 
with  a  siencU  cui  label,  so  that  there  can  be  no  error  or 
oMiteratibn  in  tiie  maridng. 

The  same  service  applies  to  individual  books  or  pack- 
ages, and  small  lots  for  mail,  freight  or  express.  This 
relieves  the  customer  of  all  care  or  trouble  in  relation 
to  shipments  consigned  to  us  for  handling. 

The  Shipping  Department  employees  are  thoroughly 
posted  on  postoffice  zones,  parcel  post  rates,  and.  the 
geography  of  tiie  country  as  rdates  to  shortest  railroad 
routes  to  points  of  destination,  and  in  many  cases  we 
obtain  considerable  money  economy  in  this  respect  for 
our  customers,  from  our  knowledge  of  the  quickest, 
diortest  and  cheapest  routes  of  shipment. 

We  have  a  daily  car  fmm  the  Shying  Department 


m 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

NBIIf 


that  the  external  appearance  of  the  package  which  con- 
tains the  finished  product  means  a  whole  lot  toward 
makiiif  a  satisfied  and  contented  customer. 


SHIPPING  DEPARTMENT 


Special  attention  is  called  to  the  Shipping  Depart- 
ment, which  is  one  of  the  most  complete  departments  of 
our  organization.  Most  of  our  customers  send  their 
orders  to  us  lor  shipment  to  their  customers,  and  we 
iiandle  this  department  of  their  business  completely, 
checking  their  addressed  labels  which  they  send  to  us, 
checking  up  the  routing,  making  the  boxes,  seeing  that 
the  order  is  carefully  counted  and  packed,  always,  in  new 
boxes  made  in  our  own  box  factory,  and  properly  labeled 
with  a  MencU  cut  label,  so  that  there  can  be  no  error  or 
obliteration  in  the  marldi^. 

The  same  senrice  applies  to  Individual  books  or  pack- 
ages, and  small  lots  for  mail,  freight  or  express.  This 
relieves  the  customer  of  all  care  or  trouble  in  relation 
to  shipments  consigned  to  us  for  handling. 

The  Shipping  Department  employees  are  thoroughly 
posted  on  postoffice  zones,  parcel  post  rates,  and  the 
gec^phy  oi  the  country  as  relates  to  shortest  raihroad 
routes  to  points  of  destination,  and  in  many  cases  we 
obtain  considerable  money  economy  in  this  respect  for 
our  customers,  from  our  knowledge  of  the  quickest, 
shortest  and  cheapest  routes  of  shipment. 

We  have  a  daily  car  from  the  Shipping  Department 


u 


I 

I 


W. 

CHICAGO 

B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

HAMMOND                       NEW  YORK 

at  tl] 

te  plant  to 

our  Shipping  Dq>artment 

in  Chicago,  the 

car  leaving  the  plant  for  Chicago  in  the  evening,  arriving 
there  with  shipments  early  the  next  morning,  and  a  car 
leaving  Chicago  for  the  plant  containing  all  commodities 
picked  up  during  the  day,  arriving  at  the  plant  ready  for 
business  in  the  morning.  This  is  for  convenience  of 
shipments  to  and  from  Chicago. 

The  ccMigcsted  freight  conditicm  in  Chicago,  as  in  all 
large  cities,  makes  it,  as  a  rule,  a  most  midesirable  ship- 
ping point  where  quick  delivery  is  required,  because  of 
the  delays  occasioned  by  the  tremendous  amount  of 
freight  delivered  to  the  various  depots  daily,  which  in 
many  cases  is  not  handled  as  promptly  as  it  should  be. 

The  railroad  traffic  associations  have  a  number  of 
transfer  points  just  outside  of  Chicago,  and  one  of  these 
particular  transfer  points  is  located  at  Gibson  Station, 
which  is  in  Hammond,  where  hundreds  of  cars  are  daily 
unloaded  for  direct  routings  in  l.  c.  l.  or  car  lots  for 
quick  distribution  to  designated  terminal  points.  This 
means  a  great  advantage  to  our  shipments,  we  being  able 
to  save  twenty-four  hours  or  more  on  many  shipments 
by  delivering  directly  to  the  Gibson  Station.  This  is 
of  vital  importance  to  customers  where  time  is  a  factor 
in  delivery. 

Hammond  is  in  the  Chicago  shipping  district  and  the 
frdght  and  express  rates  are  the  same  as  from  Chicago. 


m 

W.        CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO                      HAMMOND                       NEW  YORK 

at  the  plant  to  our  Shipping  Dq)artnient  in  Chia^o,  the 
car  leaving  the  plant  for  Chicago  in  the  evening,  arriving 
there  with  shipments  early  the  next  morning,  and  a  car 
leaving  Chicago  for  the  plant  containing  all  commodities 
picked  up  during  the  day,  arriving  at  the  plant  ready  for 
business  in  the  morning.  This  is  for  convenience  of 
shipments  to  and  from  Chicago. 

The  congested  f  reight  condition  in  Chicago,  as  in  all 
large  cities,  makes  it,  as  a  rule,  a  most  undesirable  ship- 
ping point  where  quick  delivery  is  required,  because  of 
the  delays  occasioned  by  the  tremendous  amount  of 
freight  delivered  to  the  various  depots  daily,  which  in 
many  cases  is  not  handled  as  promptly  as  it  should  be. 

The  railroad  traffic  associations  have  a  number  of 
transfer  points  just  outside  of  Chicago,  and  one  of  these 
particular  transfer  points  is  located  at  Gibson  Station, 
which  is  in  Hammond,  where  hundreds  of  cars  are  daily 
unloaded  for  direct  routings  in  L.  c.  l.  or  car  lots  for 
quick  distribution  to  designated  terminal  points.  This 
means  a  great  advantage  to  our  shipments,  we  being  able 
to  save  twenty-four  hours  or  more  on  many  shipments 
by  delivering  directly  to  the  Gibson  Station.  This  is 
of  vital  importance  to  customers  where  time  is  a  factor 
in  delivery. 

Hammond  is  in  the  Chicago  shippii^  district  and  the 
freight  and  express  rates  are  the  same  as  from  Chicago. 


Page  43 


1        W.  B. 

CONKEY 

COMPANY 

1  CHiaiioii 

HAMMOND 

MEW  YOBK 

POWER 


One  thousand  horsqx>wer  boiler  capacity  with  two 
600  horsepower  G>rliss  engines  with  generators  attached 
furnish  our  power  night  and  day,  and  having  two  units 
there  is  no  possibiHty  of  a  shut-down,  as  in  case  of  acci- 
dent to  one  the  other  is  in  immediate  readiness.  In  addi- 
tion, we  have  a  ICQ  horscpcywer  Westinghouse  engine 
with  generator  attached  for  l^t  loads  for  nights  and 
Sundays  and  in  cases  of  extraordinary  emergency. 

The  heating  plant  is  most  unique,  the  building  being 
heated  from  motor  ducts  under  the  floor  with  openings 
at  designated  places;  the  hot  air  being  supplied  by  two 
25-foot  fans  which  draw  in  the  pure  air  from  outside, 
drawii^  it  over  water-cooled  pipes  in  the  sununer-tinie 
to  cod  the  air,  and  furnish  perfect  ventilation,  and  m 
the  winter  drawing  the  pure  fresh  air  from  the  outside 
over  steam-heated  pipes,  thus  heating  this  pure  air  and 
distributing  it  through  the  buildings,  giving  perfect 
ventilation  and  the  purest  of  air  to  all  persons  employed 
in  the  buildings. 

FOREMANSHIP  PATROL 

Every  foreman  in  our  organization  is  a  master 
workman  and  has  been  selected  because  of  his  skill  and 
knowledge  in  the  particular  branch  of  which  he  is  the 
dqmrtment  head 

Oencal  asmatmce  is  provided  in  eadi  department  to 
mm44 


W.       CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO  HAMMOND  NEW  YOBK 


handle  all  details  so  that  the  foreman  may  devote  his 
entire  time  to  the  supervision  and  scrutiny  of  all  work 
passing  through  the  department,  thus  establishing  a  per- 
fect Foremanship  Patrol. 


MAILIBG  FACILITIES 


Our  Mailing  Department  is  especially  equipped  for 
handling  large  editions  of  catalogs,  magazines,  news- 
papers, etc.,  having  a  trained  organization  of  mailing 
clerks  and  wrappers  who  thoroughly  understand  this 
work. 

The  Post  Office  officials  at  Hammond  send  their  clerks 
to  our  plant  for  the  classification,  zoning,  and  distribu- 
tion of  all  mail  matter  handled  by  us,  which  assures  our 
patrons  not  only  absolute  security  in  handling  their  mail- 
ing lists,  but  the  quickest  and  most  accurate  service  in 
the  distribution  of  their  mail  matter. 

The  congested  conditions  found  in  large  cities  like 
Chicago,  New  York,  and  elsewhere  do  not  occur  in  Ham- 
mond, and  therefore  mail  matter  oftentimes  reaches  its 
destination  much  quicker  than  where  it  has  to  pass 
through  the  congested  condition  of  larger  post  offices. 

Publishers  of  catalogs,  magazines,  etc.,  can  depend 
i^KWi  a  quick  and  sure  delivery  of  mail  matter  sent  out 
from  our  plant,  because  the  stamps  or  permits  on  all  mail 
matter  are  canceled  before  wrapping,  and  is  delivered 
direct  to  the  trains  by  us,  thus  avoiding  any  delay  in 
Ae  post  office  and  saves  the  extra  handling  of  canceling 


itanips  and  t«4linmi^ 

packages  readi  your  aistomer  in  a  much  deaner  and 

BUYING  FAQLITIES 

The  advantages  presented  to  us  for  furdiasinf  of 
commodities  are  numerous. 

Our  account  wkh  paper  mills,  owing  to  the  va^ 
9momt  of  paper  used  in  our  plant,  is  particularly  attrac- 
tive. 

We  pay  ^lol  cash  for  our  purchases,  and  all  manu- 
facturers of  commodities  used  in  our  line  of  business 
arc  anxious  to  sell  us,  constantly  offering  any  bargains 
th^  may  have  because  of  our  immense  using  power, 
which,  of  course,  reflects  npoa  oar  atnlity  to  bi^  econom- 
ioOly  in  higt  quantities. 

In  many  cases  we  have  been  able  to  make  prices  to 
our  customers  for  paper  that  they  have  been  unable  to 
get  elsewhere,  and  this  service  we  include  to  all  who 
desire  to  take  advantage  of  it. 

Our  offices  in  New  York  and  Chicago  keqi  thorou^y 
posted  on  an  lines  of  book-ottkhig,  and  the  large  number 
of  inquiries  which  we  have  from  publishers  and  others 
all  Ofer  the  country  keep  us  in  constant  touch  with  the 
latest  wrinkles  in  the  art  of  book-making,  and  manufac- 
^Ts  Of  novelties  Of  all  kinds  send  samples  to  us  so  that 
we  are  m  a  position  to  give  our  customers  particuhuiy 
up-to-date  advice  in  the  coosideratioa  of  printed  matter 
and  hooks  of  an  kinds. 


W.  B. 

CONKEY 

COMPANY 

CHKACO 

HAMMONll 

MEW  mm 

Every  new  invention  pertaining  to  the  art  of  printing 
and  book-making  is  presented  to  us  on  account  of  the 
immensity  of  our  plant  and  the  opportunity  for  these 
new  machines  to  get  a  tryout  to  the  advantage  of  the 
manufacturer. 

As  has  often  been  stated,  our  plant  looks  like  a  part 
of  the  Machinery  Department  of  the  World's  Columbian 
Exposition,  placed  in  the  midst  of  a  beautiful  park  for 
the  inspection  of  publishers  and  others  who  are  interested 
in  the  art  of  printing  and  book-making. 


INSURANCE 


Our  rate  of  insurance  is  probably  the  lowest  of  any 
printing  plant  in  America,  and  this  has  been  accomplished 
so  that  the  publisher  entrusting  his  business  to  us  can 
feel  that  his  property  is  as  safe  with  us  as  it  is  pos^ble 
to  be. 

This  rate  of  insurance  is  seven  cents  per  hundred, 
and  we  carry  $1,200,000  of  insurance  on  the  plant  and 
contents  at  a  cost  to  us  of  seventy  cents  per  thousand, 
therefore  it  is  obvious  that  the  buildings  are  most  excep- 
tional or  the  insurance  company  would  not  risk  their 
mon^  on  the  plant  at  this  very  low  rate.  Our  insurance 
is  carried  in  the  Manufacturers'  Mutual  Fire  Insurance 
Company  of  Providence,  Rhode  Island  (the  Senior 
Mutuals) .  Only  the  highest  class  of  preferred  risks  that 
fully  comply  with  their  exacting  standards  are  accepted 
by  this  company. 


IP 

m 

W.  B,  CONKEY  COMPANY 

We  issue  a  contract,  accepted  by  the  insurance  com- 
pany,  allowing  our  customers  to  partiGqiate  in  our  in- 
surance at  this  rate.  This  inrevents  disturbance  of  the 
rate  by  constant  inquiry  among  insurance  s^^ents. 

One  of  the  most  important  factors  in  our  securing 
this  remarkably  low  rate,  in  addition  to  the  fireproof 
construction  of  the  buildings,  is  the  absolute  cleanliness 
and  order  maintained  in  every  nook  and  comer  of  the 
The  moral  hazard  is  taken  into  very  active  con> 
siiieratioii  by  the  insurance  companies,  as  well  as  the 
fact  that  we  have  a  ^loroughly  equipped  sprinlder  system 
toudiing  every  nook  and  comer  of  our  immense  plant. 

We  have  our  own  w^ater  supply  for  fire  protection, 
which  is  obtained  from  a  lake  in  the  park  in  front  of  the 
buildings,  containing  over  600,000  gaillons,  connected  to 
fire  pomps  situated  in  the  en|^  room,  one  with  a 
ca^adtf  of  over  1,000  gaBons  per  minute  and  continu- 
mssfy  under  pressure,  and  another  containing  500  gallons 
per  minute  capacity,  always  under  pressure,  that  auto- 
matically spring  into  action  the  moment  a  sprinkler  head 
is  released  in  any  part  of  the  plant.  In  addition  to  this 
we  have  an  emergency  water  tank  with  50,000  gallons  of 
water  at  an  elevation  of  fifty  feet  ready  for  instant  action 
hi  case  of  fire.  The  steam  in  tiie  b(»l«rs  is  never  allowed 
to  go  hdow  fifty  pounds  pressure,  night  or  day.  These 
ane  underwriters'  requirements  and  are  absolutely  obeyed. 

In  addition  to  this  an  engine  house  of  the  Hammond 
City  Fire  Department  is  located  within  one  block  of  the 
I^ant. 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CmCMCO  HAMMOWP  NEW 


A  very  large  portion  of  the  employees  working  in  the 
plant  live  in  the  immediate  vicinity,  and  the  majority  of 
them  own  their  own  homes,  thus  making  their  positions 
with  the  Company  very  much  more  permanent. 

Every  opportunity  is  afforded  our  workmen  to  buy 
their  own  homes,  and  this  has  been  very  largely  taken 
advantage  of  by  them,  which  not  only  gives  &em  de- 
lightful country  homes,  but  reduces  the  labor  turnover  in 
the  plant  very  materially.  Many  of  our  employees  have 
been  with  us  ten,  fifteen,  twenty,  twenty-five  and  thirty 
years,  thus  insuring  reliable,  steady  co-operation  as  well 
as  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  conduct  of  the  business 
through  years  of  continued  and  faithful  operation. 

Nearly  every  foreman,  as  well  as  the  executives,  are 
men  who  have  learned  their  trade  with  the  Company, 
and  by  their  lo3ralty  and  skill  in  their  particular  depart- 
ments have  obtained  positions  of  trust.  These  men  are 
all  stockholders  in  the  Company,  and  they  thoroughly 
realize  that  the  customer  is  our  employer,  and  that  he 
must  be  satisfied  at  all  times,  and  with  this  thought 
constantly  in  mind  it  is  the  object  of  each  one  of  our  or- 
ganization  to  do  the  work  assigned  him  carefully  and  in- 
telligently, assuming  in  each  case  the  full  responsibility  of 
perfect  workmanship  in  every  detail,  so  that  the  cus- 
tomer can  feel,  in  placing  his  business  with  our  organi- 
zation, that  his  interests  will  be  as  carefully  safeguarded 
and  looked  after  in  every  detail  as  though  he  were  the 

Bife  49 


P] 

i 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 
rwcMiO                ifiimniiD                 new  y<muc 

owner  of  i^ant,  and  Ins  work  the  most  important  con- 
sideration of  the  organization. 

WELFARE 

One  of  the  particular  featoies  of  our  organizatkxn, 
which  makes  for  the  bettennent  of  our  work  and  interest 
in  our  customers'  hostness,  is  our  Welfare  Department, 
in  which  employees  applying  for  work  in  any  department 
meet  with  the  head  of  our  Welfare  Department,  who 
makes  careful  inquiry  as  to  age,  education  and  training 
of  the  applicant,  and  when  satisfactory  arrangements  are 
made  this  employee  is  taken  out  to  the  foreman  or  fore- 
lady  and  propeiiy  introduced  and  Aown  the  work  whkh 
will  be  required. 

A  number  of  young*  women  are  selected  each  month 
to  act  as  assistants  to  the  Welfare  Department,  and  these 
young  women  meet  these  new  applicants  at  noon,  intro- 
ducing them  and  making  life  as  pleasant  as  can  be,  and 
infusing  that  spirit  of  home  cooditkms  which  is  so  de- 
siraUe  and  makes  for  contentment  amongr  our  employees. 

The  beautiful  park,  condsting  of  several  acres,  sur- 
rounding  the  plant,  makes  a  most  delightful  place  for  the 
employees  during  the  hours  that  they  are  not  employed, 
and  the  green  lawns,  shade  trees,  graveled  walks,  and  the 
lake  make  it  a  most  cool  and  inviting  place  during  the 
noon  hour  and  any  otfier  time  ^  they  care  to  spend  in 
tins  park,  to  which  they  have  access  at  all  times.  This 
park  is  under  tiie  constant  supervision  of  a  capable 
gardener,  and  it  is  kept  in  perfect  condition. 
ftm  so 


CONKEY 

COMPANY 

HAMMOND 

NEWVOHC 

In  inclement  weather  the  rest  and  reading  rooms 
aflFord  ample  and  pleasant  AOter,  where  every  con- 
venience IS  afforded  for  their  comfort. 

The  Welfare  Department  in  the  girls'  division  goes 
beymd  and  seeks  to  know  the  condition  behind  the  in- 
dividual girl,  and  if  we  find  that  her  home  conditions  are 
not  pleasant,  an  investigation  is  made  in  a  nfce  way,  and 
If  the  father  is  out  of  work  it  is  our  endeavor  to  provide 
or  find  enq)k>yfflent  for  Mm,  or  if  there  be  other  condi- 
tions needmg  a  religious  or  other  influence,  a  means  is 
provided  through  this  department  to  help  such  conditions. 

Wh«i  mexpcrienced  help  is  employed  they  are  taken 
to  our  Vestibule  Department  and  are  there  s^wn  tiie 
different  grades  of  work  they  are  expected  to  do,  and 
they  are  tramed  in  this  work  so  that  whm  they  ate  ac- 
quainted with  the  duties  expected  frtm  them  after  three 
or  four  days  of  service,  or  even  a  week,  they  are  turned 
OTtt  to  the  forewoman  to  occiqjy  a  position  on  our  regular 

The  education  received  in  the  Vestibule  Department, 
having  fitted  her  to  perform  the  woik  eqiected  of  her, 
all  that  ,s  required  is  proficiency  and  speed,  which  she 
will  shortly  acquire. 

The  qtiestion  of  "Wre  and  fire"  has  with  us  long  since 

of  our  Welfare  Depart- 
ment IS  to  find  the  discontented  person  in  our  staff,  and 
an  endeavor  is  made  to  ameliorate  an  unpleasant  situa- 
tion  if  such  has  arisen,  and  if  it  be  found  that  tiie  par- 
ticular person  is  not  fitted  for  the  work  he  or  she  is  domg. 

SI 


W.  1.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


CHICAGO 


instead  of  being  discharged  they  are  transferred  through 
tfic  Employment  Bureau  to  another  department,  with  the 
result  that  the  round  plug  in  the  square  hole  is  fitted  to 
a  round  hole,  in  which  he  or  she  becomes  a  valuable  asset 
to  our  otyani 


Tbit  Organization  Plan  of  The  W.  B.  Cbnkey  Com- 
pany  shown  m  the  attached  Chart  giires  a  con^nrehen* 
sivc  idea  of  the  orderly  arrangement  of  the  seventy-five 
Departments  in  our  organization. 


sa 


BOOK-BUILDING  AND  BOOK- 
MAKING 

Standasd  Rmxs  on  Preparation  of  Copv 
Selecting  Type,  Paper  and  Binmnc 


CHICAGO 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


HAMMOND 


MEir  YOBK 


BOOK-BUILDING  AND  BOOK- 

MAKING 


"DOOK-MAKING  is  an  art;  it  is  more— a  science, 
•i-^  learned  only  through  long  years  of  study,  practice  and 
development,  and  to  attempt  covering  the  subject  in  a 
single  article,  or  indeed  every  angle  and  phase  of  it  in 
one  single  volume,  would  be  preposterous.  Therefore 
each  of  the  following  items,  to  the  txteat  that  it  r^tcs 
to  the  book-making  industry,  should  be  considered  a 
partial  treatise  on  the  subject. 

The  English  language,  our  medium  of  expression,  is 
continually  changing.  New  words  with  new  meanings  are 
frequently  added  and  the  spelling  of  hundreds  of  words 
common  to  most  every  one  is  changed  to  meet  the  onward 
march  of  civilization.  Therefore  the  method  of  express- 
ing ideas  with  a  language  so  plastic  must  be  subject  to 
changes,  and  rules  and  formulas  for  its  use  cannot  be 
stated  dogmatically.  Even  our  best  authorities  differ  as 
to  the  shades  of  meaning  of  many  words  and  phrases. 

However,  there  are  many  well  defined  and  generaUy 
accepted  rules  gioveming  the  use  of  our  lai^uage,  and 
it  is  with  a  sincere  desire  to  assist  and  guide  to  higher 
standards  of  its  use  in  book-building,  and  a  better  under- 
standing of  modern  methods  and  materials  used  in  their 
manufacture,  that  this  little  book  is  sent  out 


ACCEPTED  RULES  FOR  PREPARATION 

OF  COPY 

In  the  preparation  of  manuscript  for  the  printer,  the 

first  consideration  should  be  the  style,  and  our  present 
purpose  is  best  served  by  dividing  this  subject  into  two 
divi^ons — literary  style  and  typographical  style. 

LiTSRAEY  Style 

In  its  relation  to  the  expression  of  thought  or  the 
appropriate  use  of  language,  style  must  be  left  entirely 
to  the  writer. 

Correct  literary  style  demands  that  the  ideas  lie 
properly  and  orderly  arranged ;  that  no  part  be  mentioned 
until  tiie  reader  is  prepared  to  miderstand  it,  but  tiiat 
each  be  brought  to  a  focus  at  the  place  where  it  will  con- 
tribute the  greatest  effectiveness  to  all  other  parts  and 
to  the  whole. 

Qeamess,  coherence  and  unity,  all  so  essential  to  good 
Gompositi(»i,  demand  continuity  of  thought  and  of  ex- 
pression. It  is  said  a  tiioi^;lit  is  not  wholly  bom  until 
it  is  expressed. 

The  responsibility  of  an  author  is  not  completed  until 
the  thoughts  he  expresses  are  received,  understood  and 
acted  upon  by  the  reader,  or  at  least  until  his  expressions 
are  in  a  condition  to  be  thoroughly  understandable  to  the 
average  reader.  Carlyle  is  airtliority  for  the  statement 
ibat  an  author  has  not  been  read  until  his  object,  whatever 
it  may  be»  has  been  seen  by  the  reader  as  the  autiior  saw  it. 


m 

m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

i   CHICACO                       HAMmillll                        NEW  YORK 

Typographical  Style 


Under  this  heading  we  present  such  items  as  relate 
to  setting  the  matter  in  type  in  conformity  with  generally 
accepted  rules  or  usage.  It  is  a  subject  which  commonly 
seems  to  be  little  understood,  and  should  be  considered 
just  as  much  a  part  of  a  manuscript  as  the  written  words 
m  expressions. 

How  the  work  shall  look  after  being  set  in  type  de- 
pends in  greater  measure  than  generally  recognized  upon 
the  many  details  coming  under  the  heading  of  style  in 
the  construction  and  arrangement  of  the  matter  in  type 
form. 

By  Typographical  style  is  meant  the  Spelling,  Capi- 
talization, Punctuation,  Quotations,  Abbreviations ;  when 
to  use  Figures  and  when  not  to  use  them ;  when  to  use 
Italics,  etc. 

Consistency  is  the  first  law  of  good  typographical 
style  ;  consistency  in  composition,  in  the  arrangement  of 
headings  and  subheadings  and  all  the  items  mentioned 
in  the  above  paragraph. 

All  matter  should  be  correct,  so  far  as  possible,  in 
every  detail  before  being  released  to  the  printer.  Noth- 
ing should  be  left  for  him  to  remember.  He  is  supposed 
to  follow  the  typographical  style  indicated  in  the  manu- 
script copy.  In  many  cases  the  copy  is  distributed  among 
several  different  compositors  and  if  the  manuscript  is 
not  uniformly  arranged,  ncitiier  will  it  be  when  in  type 
form. 

Page  57 


m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

GkPITALIZATIOJi  AND  SpHXING 


Under  tlm  headinf  it  is  suffident  to  say  that  con- 
m^mcy  of  trntment  demaiids  that  a  word  be  ^died 
comctly  in  every  case,  and  that  if  it  is  capitalized  in 
one  place  it  should  be  so  treated  throughout,  except  when 
used  in  a  connection  that  gives  to  the  word  a  different 
meaninsr* 

STANDARD  EULES  ON  PUNCTUATION 

Ptmctnation  is  a  subject  coming  imder  the  heading  of 
typographical  style  which  is  of  too  great  magnitude  to 
be  treated  here  in  detail.  We  offer  briefly  a  few  sug- 
gestions along  lines  which  we  believe  will  be  most  helpful, 
omitting  those  that  arc  so  well  understood  as  to  make 
tiieir  rqietition  here  unnecessary. 

Tlie  sole  purpose  of  punctuation  marks  should  be  to 
assist  in  making  the  meaning  clear;  and  when  that  end  is 
attained  their  further  use  is  superfluous. 

1.  All  direct  quotations  of  a  passage  or  phrase  from 
another  person  in  his  own  words  should  begin  and  end 
with  quotation  marks. 

2.  Double  quotation  marks  are  used  for  all  primary 
quotations;  for  a  quotation  within  a  quotation  single 

IIHuKS  &ZB  CtMTWELm 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKMCO  HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


CsmTMJMATmN  Aim  Speixihg 


Under  this  heading  it  is  sufficient  to  say  that  con- 
sistency of  treatment  demands  that  a  word  he  spdied 
correcdy  in  every  case,  and  that  if  it  is  capitalized  in 
one  place  it  should  be  so  treated  throughout,  except  when 
used  in  a  connection  that  gives  to  the  word  a  different 


STANDARD  RULES  ON  PUNCTUATION 

Punctuation  is  a  subject  coming  under  the  heading  of 
typographical  style  which  is  of  too  great  magnitude  to 
be  treated  here  in  detail.  We  offer  briefly  a  few  sug- 
gestions along  lines  which  we  believe  will  be  most  helpful, 
omitting  those  that  are  so  well  understood  as  to  make 
their  repetition  here  unnecessary. 

The  sole  purpose  of  punctuation  marks  should  be  to 
assist  in  making  the  meaning  clear ;  and  when  that  end  is 
attained  their  further  use  is  superfluous. 

QuoTiinoifs 

1.  AH  direct  quotations  of  a  passage  or  phrase  from 
another  person  in  his  own  words  should  begin  and  end 
with  quotation  marks. 

2.  Double  quotation  marks  are  used  for  all  primary 
quotations;  for  a  quotation  within  a  quotation  single 
marks  are  correct. 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


cmcAfio 


RAimoiiii 


NEW  rm/L 


3.  In  quoted  matter  with  two  or  more  paragraphs, 
cadi  new  paragraph  should  begin  with  quotation  marks ; 
but  closing  marks  should  be  used  only  at  the  end  of  the 

.  entire  quotation. 

4.  Titles  of  books,  publications,  poems,  lectures  or 
other  writings  should  be  oiclosed  in  quotaticm  nmrks. 
When  reference  is  tmdt  to  special  parts  of  a  book  as 
Index,  Preface,  etc,  such  words  should  be  capitalized  but 
mot  quoted. 

5.  In  quotations  of  two  or  more  lines  of  poetry  and 
five  lines  or  more  of  other  matter,  if  set  in  a  smaller  type 
than  the  body  of  the  text,  the  quotation  marks  may  be 
c»nitted,  but  if  set  in  the  same  size  they  should  always  be 

6.  Periods  and  commas  following  direct  quotations 
should  be  placed  within  the  quotation  marks ;  semicolons 
and  colons  should  be  placed  outside.  Exclamation  and 
interrogation  points  following  direct  quotations  should  be 
placed  inside  the  quotation  marie  only  when  a  part  of  the 
quoted  matter. 

Marks  of  Parenthesis 

Marks  of  parenthesis  are  used  to  enclose  parenthetical 
expressions,  which  are  very  remotely  related  to  the  sub- 
ject in  hand,  and  to  enclose  numbers  and  letters  used  to 
mark  divisions  of  an  enumeration. 

When  parenthetical  matter  forms  the  end  of  a  declara- 
tive sentence  any  punctuation  marks  should  follow  the 


Pkie  61 


1 

CHKACO 

B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

HAMMOND                        NEW  YQML  | 

m 
m 

mark  of  parenthesis  unless  strictly  a  part  of  tlie  paren- 
tiictical  matter. 

In  case  a  complete  sentence  is  enclosed  in  parenthesis 
the  period  should  be  placed  inside  the  marks  of  paren- 
thesis. 


.BlACKSIS 

Bradcets  are  used  in  direct  quotations  to  enclose  words 
or  ditoiations  inserted  by  the  one  who  is  quoting. 

ABBREVIATIONS 

ilules  governing  the  use  of  abbreviations  arc  most 
elastic  because  so  much  depends  upon  the  diaracter  and 
.  conteact  of  the  work.  However,  for  present  purposes  we 
wfll  divide  all  typographical  matter  into  four  classes— 
(1)  lists  or  tabular  matter,  (2)  bibliographical  matter, 
(3)  technical  matter,  and  (4)  ordinary  straight  text 
matter. 

Considering  the  last  first;  it  is  always  best  to  avoid 
abbreviations  so  far  as  posdble  in  text  matter.  If  a 
doubt  arises  at  any  time  as  to  whether  or  not  to  abbre- 
viate, the  safer  method  is  to  spell  it  out. 

In  technical  matter  abbreviate  the  common  designa- 
tions of  weights  and  measures  in  the  metric  system: 
liquid  and  dry  measure,  linear  measure,  etc;  time— in 
hours,  minutes,  seconds;  strength  in  horsepower,  candle- 
power;  latitude  and  loogitude,  etc 


m 

w 

m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHiaifiO                      HAMMOND                       NEW  imK 

Almost  every  line  of  business  has  its  list  of  recognized 
standard  abbreviations  which  it  is  always  proper  to  use 
when  dealing  with  those  subjects. 

In  bibliographical  matter  it  is  considered  proper  in 
all  references  to  scripture  passages  to  abbreviate  the  name 
of  the  bode  or  books,  as  Gen.,  Isa.,  Matt.  ;  also  the  par- 
ticular version  of  the  Bible,  as  R.  V.  (Revised  Version), 
as  well  as  the  "volume,"  "chapter,"  "section,"  "column," 
"verse,"  etc.,  followed  by  their  number,  as  Vol.  1,  Sec. 
29,  pp.  7-9. 

In  lists  and  tabular  matter  abbreviate  the  name  of 
states,  territories  and  possessions  of  the  United  States, 
following  those  of  towns,  as  Colo.,  P.  I.  (Philippine 
Islands),  Mass.,  etc 

There  are  a  few  titles  that  are  almost  always  abbre- 
viated, as  Mr.,  Mrs.,  Dr.,  Rev.,  Hon.,  St.  (for  street)  ; 
also  college  degrees  and  military  and  naval  titles.  Other 
titles  of  honor  in  religious  and  civil  forms  of  address 
should  be  spelled  out. 

WHEN  TO  USE  FIGURES 

1.  In  general  text  matter  it  is  well  to  avoid  the  use 
of  figures  as  much  as  possible.  However,  it  is  not  un- 
common to  use  them  for  numbers  of  ten  or  more,  and 
when  giving  a  series  of  two  or  more  numbers  together 
their  use  is  preferable. 

2.  In  general  text  matter  it  is  common  to  use  figures 
for  100  or  above,  except  in  large  round  numbers,  as 
a  million  or  five  billions,  etc. 

Page  63 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


3.  Smns  of  money  are  generally  printed  in  figures. 
Ml  large  round  numbers  as  given  on  page  63. 

4.  In  statistical  matter  all  numbers  should  be  in 
%ures. 

5.  Dimensions,  distances,  wei^ts,  dtffctes,  percen- 
tige,  etc,  alMnild  be  given  in  figures. 

6.  Spell  out  all  numbers,  large  or  small,  when  used 
to  h^itt  a  sentence,  the  age  of  persons  or  things,  and  the 
time  of  day  except  in  enumerations  and  in  connection 
with  A.  M.  and  P.  M.,  when  figtures  should  always  be 
used. 

7.  Be  consistent.  If  a  mmiber  is  spelled  out  in  one 
place  it  ^lonld  be  in  every  place  when  used  in  a  similar 
comiectioii.  The  same  ifflies  in  the  use  of  figures. 


ITAUCS 

There  are  certain  well  recognized  uses  of  the  italic 
letter  which,  however  much  abused,  serve  a  good  purpose. 
Their  most  common  use  is  for  the  purpose  of  giving  em- 
phasis^ in  which  case  they  adueve  their  purpose  if  they 
ate  used  sparing^.  The  frequent  practice  of  italicizing 
words  for  emphasis  spoils  rather  than  adds  to  the  effect. 

1.  All  foreign  words  and  phrases  plainly  used  as 
such  should  be  printed  in  italics.  This,  however,  does  not 
include  words  or  phrases  adopted  from  other  languages 
which  have  come  into  general  usage.  AH  sudi  are  re- 
ff0cded  as  Ani^idzed  even  when  retaming  their  original 
accents.  Exan^ks  are :  debut,  cafe,  resume,  etc. 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICACO  HAMMOND  NEW  yORK. 


2.  In  signatures  with  title  or  position  added  after 
the  name  such  title  or  position  should  be  italicized :  e.  g., 
John  H.  Jones,  Secretary. 

3.  Certain  words,  phrases  and  abbreviations  fre- 
quently used  in  literary  and  legal  composition  should 
always  be  in  italics,  as  et  ol.,  ibid,,  idem.,  sic,  supra,  and 
vide.  These,  however,  should  not  be  confused  with  etc., 
e.  g.,  i.  e.,  vs.,  or  viz.,  in  which  italics  should  not  be  used. 

4.  Italicize  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  when  used  to 
indicate  subdivisions  in  a  paragraph,  as  (a),  (6),  (c),  etc. 

5.  Letters  in  options  to  illustrations,  or  in  the  text 
when  referring  to  corresponding  letters  in  accompanying 
illustrations,  should      in  italics. 

6.  If  a  particular  letter  of  the  alphabet  is  referred 
to  in  the  text  as  such,  the  letter  g,  a  small  d,  etc.,  it  should 
be  italicized. 

7.  In  resolutions  italicize  the  word  "Resolve,**  but 
not  the  word  "Whereas." 


SlLECnNG  THE  TyPE  FaCE  FOR  YoUR  BoOK 

The  great  majority  of  books  are  set  in  from  8  to  12 
point  type,  depending  on  the  nature  of  the  subject  treated, 
the  purpose  of  the  book  and  the  class  or  age  of  people  for 
which  it  is  intended. 

Fiction  is  seld<»n  set  in  less  than  10  point  type  and 
frequently  in  11  or  12  point,  and  nearly  always  leaded 
with  a  1  or  2  point  lead. 

In  some  cases  where  the  subject  matter  is  not  suffi- 

Bftfe  65 


cknt  for  a  book  of  a  dcstiahle  siie  if  set  in  8  or  10  point, 
even  tiiou^  custom  requires  it  so,  it  may  be  set  m  11 
or  12  point  and  leaded  in  order  to  make  a  larger  sized 
book. 

In  case  the  subject  matter  is  too  great  in  amount  for 
a  book  of  the  desired  size  if  set  in  an  11  or  12  pdnt  type 
it  is  often  aet  in  a  smaller  face  if  the  nature  of  the  work 
win  permit  However,  the  book  must  be  easily  readable, 
even  diougb  a  clear,  readable  type  makes  it  slightly  larger 
than  desired. 

School  books  are  generally  set  in  from  10  to  18  point 
type — larger  type  for  the  lower  grades  and  younger 
pupils.  Thin  hair-line  type  riionld  be  avoided  as  far  as 
fNmible  in  diildren's  books  of  every  diaracter,  and  no 
tfpt  aiMNtld  be  used  except  the  most  readable,  with  dis- 
tinct lines.  Eye-strain  can  be  easily  caused  by  small  or 
fine  lined  type  faces. 

A  number  of  excellent  t3rpe  faces  for  general  bode 
work  are  shown  on  pi^  115-134  of  diis  book. 


Selecting  Paper  Stock  for  Your  Book 

There  is  so  much  variation  in  the  styles  of  books— 
the  nature  of  the  subject  matter,  the  purpose  it  is  in- 
tended to  serve,  the  size  of  the  book,  the  price  for  which 
it  is  to  seU,  the  number  of  ilhistratkms  it  is  to  contain, 
etc,  all  of  wfakh  make  eadi  book  or  dass  of  books  a  little 
different  from  others — that  the  style  of  paper  to  use 
presents  its  own  individual  problem.  Needless  to  say,  it 


m 

IP' 

W.        CONKEY  COMPANY 
aacACo              numMiiiiii  vrnvrnK 

should  look  the  part  it  is  to  W  and  be  harmonious  with 
others  of  a  similar  class. 

If  the  book  is  to  contain  a  great  many  illustrations  a 
smooth  inished  paper  should  be  used.  If  there  are  few 
or  no  illustrations  a  bulkier  paper  is  often  best,  printing 
the  illustration  on  a  high  finished  paper  and  tipping  in 
at  the  proper  place. 

A  careful  perusal  of  article  on  Book  Papers,  beginning 
on  page  169  of  this  book,  will  be  found  he^ful  in  deckl- 
mg  this  most  in^rtant  item. 


Selecting  the  Binding  for  Your  Book 

Styles  for  the  binding  of  books  varies  but  little  from 
one  decade  to  another.  In  general  ail  but  the  better  bind- 
ii^  are  now  made  by  machine  instead  of  by  hand,  which 
fact  is  responsible  in  large  measure  for  the  low  cost  of 
bookbinding  as  compared  with  former  times. 

Bookbindings  should  be  suited  to  the  subjects  treated 
and  in  general  harmony  with  the  other  materials  used,  as 
paper  stock,  etc.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  state  that  a 
poor  quality  of  paper  and  a  high  class  binding,  or  vice 
versa,  do  not  show  good  taste.  Consistency  requires  much 
in  the  book-making  industry. 

The  object  of  the  book,  the  class  of  people  who  will 
use  it  and  the  mission  it  is  to  fill  largely  dictate  the  style 
of  binding  to  use  in  each  individual  case. 

For  detailed  information  on  the  various  stj^es  of 
binding  see  page  157. 

6f 


P3 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


Pbepabing  Illustbahons 


The  illustrations  in  a  bode  ^oiild  be  as  nearly  imi- 
f orm  in  size  as  posabie,  and  tbe  captions  therefor  should 
nreljr  exceed  two  lines  in  kngtb-one  being  better  if  the 
illustration  is  small*  (For  kinds  of  illustrations  see 
page  79.) 


FMKPMumon  or  Immx 


Most  books  are  incomplete  without  an  index,  and  the 
more  tmtgkx  the  subjects  treated  the  more  necessary  a 
comi^ete  index  becomes  if  the  full  iralue  of  the  book  is 
to  be  had. 

An  index  cannot,  as  a  rule,  be  too  liberal.  Every 
word  which  will  aid  in  directing  the  reader  to  the  sub- 
ject he  seeks  should  appear  in  the  index. 

ORDER  OF  CONTENT  ARRANGEMENT 

IN  BOOKS 


The  general  order  in  the  arrangement  of  the  contents 
of  a  book  in  pages  is :  Half-title  and  blank  page,  blank 
and  frontispiece,  full  title  and  copyright  notice,  dedica- 
tkm  and  blank  page,  preface,  list  of  contents,  list  of 
illustrations,  text  matter,  appendix,  glossary  aiKl  index. 


Bwe  fit' 


BUILDING  A  CATALOG 


Size  of  the  Catalog 

The  Kind  of  Paper  to  Use 


• 

m 

l3 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKAIGO                     HAMMOIfD                      NEW  YOKK 

BUILDING  A  CATALOG 

A CATALOG  is  a  vehicle  lor  carrying  the  message  of 
those  sending  it  to  the  peopie  they  sedc  to  interest  in 
^r  merchandise  or  service.  Unless  this  first  essential 
of  having  a  real  and  definite  message  to  deliver  exists, 
there  would  be  little  use  for  the  catalog.  The  primary 
essential,  therefore,  is 

Thb  Message 

In  catalog  compiling  style  is  usually  given  very  little 
consideration.  It  is  well  to  state  here,  however,  that  the 
language  used  should  be  the  simplest  that  the  subject  will 
bear,  and  so  clearly  set  forth  that  the  full  meaning  will 
be  readily  comprehended  by  every  person  to  whom  it  is 
addressed.  It  should  be  free  f rmn  extravi^iant  daims  of 
svtperiority,  and  consist  principally  of  direct,  rather  than 
Involved,  sentences.  The  fewest  words  possiMe  should 
he  used  to  tell  the  story. 

Size  of  Catmjog 

When  the  message  is  in  concrete  form  the  next  point 
to  determine  is  the  size  and  shape  of  the  catalog  and  the 
number  of  pages  it  should  contain. 

In  sizes  there  is  a  great  variety,  but  as  a  rule  most 
lines  of  business  have  a  more  or  less  well  establi^ed 

Pite  71 


m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CnCtfiO                    IHMMWID  MEVIRIUC 

custom  as  to  the  size  of  catalog  best  adapted  to  their 
business.  Few  concerns  care  to  get  out  a  smaller  catalog 
than  con^ietiiig  houses  who  stq)ply  catalogs  of  similar 
artadcs  to  Hie  same  trade. 

If  the  line  or  fidd  is  a  new  one,  the  character  of  tlie 
{Hroduct  advertised,  its  cost  and  importance,  the  number 
of  illustrations  to  the  page,  the  best  size  for  correctly 
displaying  the  articles,  and  the  class  of  people  who  are 
expected  to  buy  are  all  important  factors  to  be  considered 
ill  determining  the  size  of  a  catalog  or  booklet 

Naturally  a  large  line  of  goods  requires  a  catalc^  large 
in  propGrtion;  a  small  line  in  smilar  proportion.  A  line 
requiring  large  display  illustrations  is  usually  printed  on 
a  targe  sized  page,  depending  upon  the  necessary  amount 
of  descriptive  matter ;  and  those  demanding  small  illustra- 
tions on  a  proportionately  smaller  page,  eq^edally  if  the 
ine  being  advertised  Is  not  a  laige  one. 

Sfbomeh  Faces 

When  the  size  has  been  determined,  one  or  more  s^^cd- 
men  pages  should  be  set  tq>,  unless  the  catalog  is  being 
modded  after  another  which  has  been  previously  printed. 
The  specimen  pages  serve  as  a  basis  for  determining 
approximately  the  number  of  pages  that  will  be  required. 

Gofir  AMD  Layout 

By  "copy"  is  meant  such  matter,  usually  in  type- 
written or  manuscript  form,  as  is  to  become  the  sub- 


W.  B. 

CONKEY 

COMPANY 

CHICAGO 

HAMMOND 

NEW  YORK 

"Layout" 


Page  73 


Printed  Page  as  Indicated  in  Layout 

■  '■■  •  ^  oF*CTn«iiia  coMVAiiy,  salem,  owto.  v.  s.  a. 

StYcr's  Advance  Post  Drills 
9tm  HAMD  pomn       ,  vqr  bslt  ok  hand  power 


L*wrtd  Wattrl.   Our  aulomalie  fecdinc  device  i» 
t  eery  latest  improved  inechinical  coiutruction. 

__      .-  .    .iir-  *ti  itk  of  tke  apindle  and  worked  hr  \  cam  on 

L*'",'**'*':  ,T>iac«m  iaeo«aliim«J  ae  »a  to  give  nearly  a  continMoui  feed    Bi  Ikia 
aniemenl  the  drill  don  not  Jam  hMd  Ik*  work,  aa  ia  frequently  Uw  caac  in  the  uae  of  band  drill*. 
T  L.'""T,"  "         '  »*'«■■■'■'  "i*      "Wll  tpindle  and  the  Ubie  ia  at  rifhl  angles  witk  it 
» -l3L.il.  ^k'"'  n'  »■•»»"«         »«">>«  li  2M  inches.   They  should  be  iwcded  about 

eevMtitioiu.  whtcb  will  turn  the  «oindle  1?0. 
-  -    '»'»?aa'°M-Sne  of  >pindle.  I  inch:  run  of  tpindle.  J  inches,  sue  of  column.  lA  inches,  greatest 
— "  »*??.'*  '°  '«»  inches;  spindle  turns  IM  times  to  one  turn  of  crank  on  fast  speed: 

jgyP^'WU^tpone  turn  of  a^tndle  on  alow  speed;  drills  to  center  of  15  inch  circle  and  up  to 
»w  IH£  amm  agiiHli  bored  for  14  incb  rotnd  shank  drilla.  unless  otherwise  ordered. 
.  .  WiW  ItMii  »i  »ll.  l7»a  i«;b«a(oiiFif.Wl.  I7a  l5  inches).    Teal  hci«kl  4S  iacbc*.  table  • 
<skwl.6hickM«UKIcr.  ly  wheel.  I4i  ^ 


III 


SIZES  AND  PRICES 


Ko.  12.  Weight  I2S  lbs  


..mm 


Page  74 


m 

IP 

m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKAOO                    HAimaND                     NEW  VOUC 

Stance  of  the  book,  catalog  or  booklet,  which  is  given 
to  the  printer  to  arrange  in  type  form,  together  with  all 
cuts  and  illustrations,  and  a  "layout"  for  each  page  of 
the  protective  catak^. 

The  layout  ccmststs  of  a  dummy  marked  off  page  by 
page,  indicating  the  position  of  the  headings,  sub-headings, 
tic  text  and  the  illustrations  which  the  finished  product 
shall  contain. 

The  layout  need  not  be  as  elaborate  as  that  shown  on 
a  previous  page  of  this  book.  But  if  it  serves  only  to 
make  dear  the  space  available  for  type  and  cuts  and 
their  rdative  positions,  it  will  have  served  a  useful 
purpose. 

To  avoid  costly  mistakes,  all  written  copy  should  be 
in  typewriting  and  should  be  gone  over  carefully  in  search 
of  errors  in  grammatical  construction,  proper  and  tech- 
nical names,  dates  and  numbers,  as  the  correction  of  these 
in  proof  means  additional  expoise  when  detected,  and  if 
not  discovered  may  seriously  impair  the  value  of  the 
catalog. 

Having  ascertained  the  size  and  number  of  pages  in 
the  catalog  and  the  kind  of  illustrations  required,  the  next 
item  to  be  definitely  settled  is 

Trb  KiifD  OF  Pafek  to  Use 

The  quality  of  paper  must  be  harmonious  with  the 
line  being  advertised.  That  is  to  say,  a  poor  quality  of 
paper  should  not  be  used  in  advertising  a  high  grade  line 

Fllft  7S 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CmCAOO  HAMMOND 


of  goods,  nor  vke  versa.  Neither  can  illustrations  of 
li^h  character  be  printed  successlully  on  a  poor  quality 
of  papef. 

Most  catalc^  containing  ilhistrations  are  printed  on 
a  reasonably  smooth  finished  paper,  the  cheaper  catalogs 

on  ordinary  Catalog  Opacity,  or  S.  &  S.  C,  and  the 
better  qualities  on  enameled  paper. 


SiLScniiG  TBM  Cover  PAPBt 

Fnrst  impresmns  of  ten  last  longest.  The  first  sugges- 
tion received  from  a  catalog  or  book  is  that  presented  by 
the  cover.  The  man  who  believes  that  psychology  plays 
an  important  part  in  selling  will  not  dispute  that  aside 
from  the  size  of  a  catalog,  the  color  and  thickness  of  the 
alter,  the  de^gn  thereon  and  the  harmonious  (or  dash- 
ing) colors  of  ink  used  in  printing  make  the  first  deep 
impression  on  the  mind  of  the  prospective  customer. 

Naturally  the  object  desired  is  that  these  early  im- 
pressions be  favorable,  inviting  the  recipient  to  open  and 
examine  the  contents  of  the  catalog.  The  favorable  im- 
pmmxm  is  the  first  essential  to  all  successful  selling. 

As  in  selecting  paper  stiodc  for  the  body  of  the  catabg, 
so  here  the  quality  and  color  must  fit  the  line  advertised. 
And  of  almost  equal  importance  is  consideration  of  the 
class  of  people  to  be  reached. 

If  the  catalog  carries  a  toilet  article  or  jewelry  mes- 
sage to  women,  it  should  have  a  dainty  cover.  If  an 
adverttsement  of  a  bank  it  should  show  dignity  and 

flie  11 


B.  CONKEY 

COMPANY 

CmCAlGO 

HAMMOND 

NEW  YORK 

strength — a  conservative  color — nothing  flashy.  If  the 
line  is  heavy  machinery  and  the  catalog  goes  into  the 
hands  of  the  workmen  in  the  shop,  the  cover  stock  should 
be  strong,  tough  and  durable  and  of  a  dark  color  not 
easily  soiled. 


ARRANGEMENT  OF  CATALOG  CONTENTS 

No  one  rule  seems  to  be  sufficiently  well  established 
in  the  arrangement  of  the  contents  of  the  catalog,  except 
in  certain  individual  lines  of  business,  to  warrant  a  general 
rule  formula. 

A  frequent  practice  concerning  the  Index  is  to  place 
it  in  the  front  part  of  the  catalog  for  the  convenience  and 
easy  accessibility  of  the  customer  in  finding  the  articles 
desired. 

Simplicity,  order  and  clearness,  together  with  the  size 
and  nature  of  the  line  advertised  are  usually  the  guiding 
principles  which  dictate  to  the  wide-awake  Compiler  or 
Advertising  Manager  just  how  the  various  parts  or  sec- 
tions of  the  catalog  should  be  assembled  and  the  details 
may  well  be  left  to  his  judgment 


1 1  'JRk'^  ■ 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


Hai^-tone  Pbocess 
Ben  Dey  Process 
Other  Pbocesses 


BEN  DEY  SHADING  TINTS 

Half'tone,  line  tints,  grains,  textures  and  stipples,  of  whicii 
only  a  few  samples  are  shown.   Combinations  of  these 

can  be  made  into  a  great  variety  of  patterns 


TINT  PLATES 


Used  in  a  variety  of  ways  in  illustrating,  or  for  adding 
to  the  appearance  of  type  pages 


Half-tones  of  Various  Screens  made  from 
the  same  Photograpli 


17&-ltiie 


The  Various  Styles  of  Finishing 
Half-tones 


Background 
Vignetted  Removed 


SPECIMEN  ZINC  ETCfflNGS 

ReproHuced  from  pen  drawings 


SPECIMEN  WOOD  CUT 


Note  the  contrast  of  color  and  sharpness  of  detail 
Wood  cuts  can  be  reproduced  £rom  any  kind  of  copy 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

diKACO  HAHMOND   NEW  YDMC 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

THE  kind  of  illustrations  best  suited  to  any  book  or 
catalog  is  determined  largely  by  the  nature  of  the  sub- 
ject treated,  the  kind  of  paper  it  is  desired  to  use  in  print- 
ing; the  of  acoifacy  required  in  bringing  out  the 
details,  etc 

The  sub  ject  can  be  coirercd  here  to  the  best  advantage 
by  considering  separately  each  dlH^^  processes 
commonly  used  in  illustrating. 

THE  HALF-TONE  PROCESS 

Half-tone  engraving  is  the  process  of  reprodudng 
photographs,  wash-drawings,  and  illustrations  of  similar 
nature  on  metal  plates— usually  copper— for  use  in  prmt- 
ing.  They  are  produced  by  photographing  the  desip 
through  a  screen  or  glass,  upon  which  is  drawn  a  series 
of  lines  crossing  each  other  at  right  an^es.  If  these  lines 
are  numerous  and  dose  tether— say  150  or  175  to  the 
;nrV.--^li<^  half-tcme  is  said  illM  a  fine  screen-:if 
the  lines  are  few  and  far  apart,  comparatively,  say  55 
or  75  to  the  inch,  the  half-tone  is  said  to  have  a  coarse 
screen. 

The  native  produced  by  this  method  of  photography 
consists  of  lines  and  dots  of  various  sizes  and  shapes, 
depending  on  the  lights  and  shadows  of  the  photograph. 
(These  variations  are  called  •*toncs"— "half-tones," 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

€MK»m  HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


"middle-tones,"  "quarter-tones/'  The  n^aliye  is 

then  printed  on  a  copper  or  zinc  plate  which  is  etched 
in  a  hath  of  add.  The  plates  are  ttoi  rooted,  trimmed, 
and  mounted  on  wood  blocks. 

Half-tones  are  finished  in  several  different  styles- 
square,  oval,  vignette  and  outline,  as  shown  on  page  83. 

The  square  half-tone  is  the  ordinary  finish  and  is 
made  either  with  or  without  a  line  border.  If  the  back- 
ground is  dark  or  hexvy  the  line  border  may  well  be 
omitted.  If  it  is  li|^t,  custom  nsoally  requires  the  border. 
The  vignetted  half-tone  has  a  fading,  shadowy  edge.  The 
iwitlined  half-tone  has  the  background  routed  away.  Com- 
bination half-tones  and  line  plates  are  produced  by  cutting 
and  transferring  the  negatives. 

As  it  is  impossible  to  make  a  good  half-tone  from 
poor  copy,  it  is  important  that  the  illustration  which  is 
to  be  rqnroduced  should  be  as  sharp  and  distinct  and  as 
free  frwn  defects  as  possible.  It  is  advisable  that  draw- 
ings or  photographs  should  be  at  least  twice  as  large  as 
the  proposed  half-tone,  though  it  is  possible  to  make  plates 
larger  than  the  original  copy.  When  phot(^;raphs  are 
printed  on  smooth,  gtossy  paper,  Acy  furnish  the  best 
copy  lor  half-tones. 

Unless  a  photograph  is  very  dear,  it  should  be  re- 
touched by  an  artist  bef(H%  a  half-tone  is  made  from  it. 
Most  photographs  of  machinery  require  so  much  retouch- 
ing that  they  are  practically  re-sketched  before  plates  are 
made  from  them. 


1  Jm^^'f\ 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

dOCACO                      HAMMOND                       NEW  YORK 

To  ascertain  the  required  screen  of  a  half-tone  it  is 
necessary  to  know  the  kind  and  quality  of  paper  stodc 
which  is  to  be  used  in  printing.  Rough  paper  requires 
a  half-tone  with  a  coarse  screen;  the  plates  with  fine 
screens  are  suited  only  to  papers  with  highly  finished  or 
enameled  surfaces.  The  average  screens  employed  for 
book  and  caMog  work  are  110  to  150  lines  to  the  inch. 

Zinc  Half-tones 

Half-tones  on  zinc  are  made  exactly  the  same  as  those 
on  copper,  with  the  exception  of  the  etching  for  grada- 
tion of  the  siie  of  the  dots.  The  nature  of  the  metal 
will  not  permit  fine  etchmg,  and  therefore  only  the  coarser 
screened  half-tones  can  be  made  in  this  manner.  This 
style  of  half-tone  is  particularly  adapted  to  newspapers 
or  other  low  finished  papers. 

Where  a  long  run  is  required  such  plates  must  be 
electrotyped  or  stereotyped  and  the  printing  done  from 
these  rather  than  directly  from  the  zinc.  About  the  only 
real  advantage  zinc  half-tones  have  over  copper  is  the 
lower  cost  of  the  zinc  and  the  lightness  in  weight,  whkh 
is  sometimes  a  factor  in  the  reduction  of  postage  costs. 

Process  Coloe  Plates 

Color  plates  are  produced  in  half-tone  by  what  arc 
generally  known  as  the  toee  and  four  color  processes, 
although  two  color  plates  may  be  made  and  used  for 

FiCe  87 


(liffijjl 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

printiiig  my  two  contrasting  cdors.  In  the  three-color 
process  three  separate  plates  are  made  for  printing  with 
jrcllow,  red  and  blue  respectively. 

In  the  four-color  process  the  method  is  the  same, 
earcept  that  the  blue  is  of  a  lighter  shade  and  the  extra 
cdor  is  black  or  dark  gray,  caUed  the  key  plate,  the  use 
of  which  renders  greater  aocmcy  and  a  wider  range  of 
color  lepfoductions.  The  three  and  four  color  processes 
r^rodoce  faithfully  ahnost  any  number  of  colors  or 
iliades  of  color. 

Each  plate  is  made  by  photographing  through  a  colored 
glass  known  as  a  filter,  which  excludes  all  rays  of  tig^t 
CEccft  tliose  of  tiie  cdor  in  whk^  that  parHciilar  plate 
IS  10  oe  pnnteo. 

Ziitc  Gocm  FtATBs 

Color  plates  of  zinc  are  not  to  be  confused  with 
process  color  plates.  The  latter  embodies  the  principle 
of  printing  one  color  directly  on  top  of  another  and  the 
two  or  more  colors  of  ink  bknding  together  produce  still 
other  tones  of  color.  Wtdi  zinc  pktes  the  process 
«fiffers  in  that  each  color  of  ink  used  stands  out  dis- 
tinctly separate  from  the  others,  and  while  the  closest 
registry  of  color  is  altogether  practical,  yet  as  a  rule  no 
one  color  is  printed  on  top  of  another.  They  are  used 
for  printmg  from  two  to  eight  cokMrs. 

However,  tiiere  is  a  process  of  making  zinc  plates 
wfak^  win  permit  gradatioii  of  cdors  and  tints  known 
as  the  Ben  Dey  Ptooess. 

88 


W.        CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHlCjyDO  HAimOKD   ^Q"^ 


Zmc  Etchings 

Zinc  etchh^,  sometimes  called  Une  engravings,  are 
produced  by  photx^nfliy  in  a  manner  similar  to  half- 
tones, except  that  no  screen  is  used  m  making  the  na- 
tive. After  printing  the  zinc  plate  is  etched  with  acki  to 
a  proper  depth  and  the  larger  open  spaces  are  routed,  so 
that  the  background  will  not  rqjroduce  in  printing. 

Direct  reproductions  by  zinc  etchings  cannot  be  made 
from  photographs,  wash-drawings,  half-tones,  blue  prints, 
flat  tints,  or  pictures  with  blurred  shadows.  However, 
any  drawings  or  print  consisting  of  Imes  or  dots  which 
will  photograph,  such  as  pen  drawings,  wood  engravn^, 
printed  pages  or  forms  consisting  wholly  of  distinct  lines, 
etc.,  may  be  reproduced  faithfully  by  this  process. 
Enlargements  of  fine  ei^vings  often  can  be  made  to 

advantage.  ,      .  e 

The  cost  of  zinc  etchmgs  is  considerably  less  than  ot 
half-tones,  but  prices  of  both  vary,  depending  on  size  and 
quantity  ordered  at  one  time. 

THE  BEN  DEY  PROCESS 

This  process  is  considered  one  of,  if  not  the  greatest, 
advancements  in  modem  times  in  the  production  and 
use  of  zhic  plates  in  printp||  By  this  method  a,  great 
variety  of  patterns  and  shading  of  colors  and  tmts  is  pos- 
sible. The  patterns  cover  straight  line  tints,  curve  tints, 
^ns,  textures  and  hand  and  mechanical  stipples,  of 
which  samples  are  shown  on  page  81. 

Pige  89 


1 


CHKAAO 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


HAimOND 


NEW  YOMC 


By  this  process  gradations  from  a  light  to  a  dark  tint 
can  be  produced,  giving  all  the  tones— light,  light  gray, 
gray,  dark  gray  and  black;  or  in  the  color  work,  gradation 
of  red  to  pink,  etc^  just  as  the  gray  is  produced  in  the 
yack  plate. 

However,  the  blending  of  colors  is  not  so  successful, 
Ac  copper  process  plates  being  much  better  adapted  to 
this  class  of  wmk. 

Tint  Plates 

Unt  plates  usually  consist  of  a  solid  piece  of  zinc  or 
copper  lor  use  as  a  f oundatkm  or  panel  for  a  type  page. 

They  can  be  made  with  special  borders  cut  in  such  a 
way  as  to  add  greatly  to  the  effectiveness  of  type  matter 
or  illustrations.  When  printed  under  half-tones  they 
often  give  a  two-color  effect,  which  is  very  desirable  in 
some  dasses  of  advertising  catak>gs,  booklets,  etc 

The  cost  of  such  plates  is  yery  n^ligible. 

Woo©  Cots 

Wood  cuts,  which  are  engravings  on  wood,  are  often 
used  when  special  sharpness  of  outline  is  desired  in  re- 
producing illustrations  of  furniture,  jewelry,  machinery, 
etc  They  are  also  useful  for  catabgs  printed  on  a  cheap 
grade  of  pa^,  but  are  not  printed  from  direct  by  reason 
of  the  wear  on  their  surface  Electrotypes  made  from 
them  are  used  instead  for  this  purpose 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CmCACO  HAMMONII  NEW  YOftK 


By  this  process  gradations  from  a  light  to  a  dark  tint 
can  be  produced,  giving  all  the  tones— light,  light  gray, 
gray,  dark  gray  and  black ;  or  in  the  color  work,  gradation 
of  red  to  pink,  etc.,  just  as  the  gray  is  produced  in  the 
l^K:k  plate. 

However,  the  blending  of  colors  is  not  so  successful, 
the  copper  process  plates  being  much  better  adapted  to 
this  class  of  work. 


TllIT  Flatis 

Tint  i^tes  usually  consist  of  a  solid  piece  of  zinc  or 
copper  for  use  as  a  foundation  or  panel  for  a  type  page. 

They  can  be  made  with  special  borders  cut  in  such  a 
way  as  to  add  greatly  to  the  effectiveness  of  type  matter 
or  illustrations.  When  printed  under  half-tones  they 
often  give  a  two-color  effect,  which  is  very  desirable  in 
some  classes  of  advertising  catalogs,  booklets,  etc 

The  cost  of  sudi  plates  is  very  negligible. 


Wood  Cuts 


Wood  cuts,  which  are  engravings  on  wood,  are  often 
used  when  special  sharpness  of  outline  is  desired  in  re- 
producing illustrations  of  furniture,  jewelry,  machinery, 
etc  They  are  also  useful  for  catak^  printed  on  a  cheap 
grade  of  paper,  but  are  not  printed  from  direct  by  reason 
of  the  wear  on  their  surface.  Electrotypes  made  from 
them  are  used  instead  for  this  purpose 

Page  90 


CHKMaO 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


NCir  VOBK 


Electrotypes 

Electrotypes  are  not  engravings,  but  merely  metal 
copies  of  half-tones,  zinc  etchings,  wood  cuts,  type  pages, 
etc.  A  wax  mold  is  made  of  the  object  to  be  copied,  and 
by  means  of  electricity  copper  is  deposited  on  this  mold 
until  it  attains  a  shell  of  sufficient  thickness  to  be  used  in 
printing.  It  is  then  strengthened  with  a  backii^  of  hard 
metal,  the  standard  thickness  being  eleven  points.  Elec- 
tros are  mounted  on  wood  or  metal  to  make  them  type 
high.  For  books  and  other  large  work  they  are  finished 
unmounted  with  beveled  edges  and  called  patent  block 
plates. 

Electrotypes  are  much  more  durable  than  half-tones, 
zinc  etchings,  wood  cuts,  etc.,  and  are  generally  used  for 
large  edition  printing.  They  are  also  usef  ul  when  it  is 
desirable  to  duplicate  the  same  copy  many  times,  and  in 
printing  the  results  are  ahnost  as  good  as  the  original. 

Nickel-Steeltyfes 

Nickel-steeltypes  are  similar  to  electros,  except  that  a 
deposit  of  steel  is  first  made  on  the  face  of  the  mold 
which  makes  the  printing  surface  hard,  insuring  greater 
wearing  qualities  and  sharpness.  They  are  superior  to 
electrotypes  in  every  respect,  especially  on  half-tone  work, 
because  the  dots  in  the  steeltype  are  sharper  and  more 
like  the  original  engraving.  They  are  also  stronger  and 
color  inks  have  no  effect  upon  them  as  they  do  on  elec- 
trotypes. 


(IP 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

m 

How  TO  DSfSftlf  1MB  THE  D1MBN8IOMS  OT  A  Cot 


It  is  iMcessary  to  remember  that  both  height  and  width 
of  a  drawiii^  or  photograph  reduce  proporticmatdy  on  a 
diagonal,  as  shown  in      diagram  bdow. 


<5 

St^>pose,  lor  instance,  the  size  of  a  photograph  you 
desire  to  have  reduced  is  indicated  by  the  rectanf^e  A  B 

Lay  off  a  rectangle  having  the  same  dimensions  on  a 
piece  of  paper  and  draw  the  diagonal  line,  E  B. 

Mark  off  on  bottom  line  the  width  £  F  of  cut  you 
desire  y*^^. 


The  point  at  which  the  perpendicular  D  F  touches  the 
diagonal  E  B  will  give  you  the  height  of  your  cut  when 
reduced. 

In  the  same  way,  having  marked  off  the  height  of  your 
proposed  cut— C  E— you  may  determine  its  width  from 
the  point  at  which  the  diagcmal  is  touched  by  the  hori- 
zontal line  C  D, 


Page  95 


TYPOGRAPHY 


Tm  Measurement 
Estimating  Composition 
Pboof-readers'  Maeks 


HP 

m 

i 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

cmCACO                     HAMMOND                      NEW  YOBK 

TYPOGRAPHY 

FOR  hundreds  of  years  the  greatest  medium  of  expres- 
sion, the  greatest  channel  for  the  conveyance  of 
tiioiigiit  from  one  mind  to  another—hence  the  greatest 
servant  of  the  civilized  peoples  of  the  world— has  been 

printer's  type. 

Types  have  been  made  by  hand  and  machine  in  all  the 
known  languages  of  the  earth  and  used  in  telling  every 
shade  of  fact  and  story,  but  today  the  use  of  type  is  by 
far  more  extensive  than  ever  before. 

Type  gives  us  daily  news  of  the  occurrences  through- 
out the  entire  world ;  type  educates  our  children  and  gives 
pleasure  and  instruction  to  us  all.  But— before  type  can 
perform  at  all  it  must  pass  through  the  hands  of  the  com- 
positor and  printer.  True,  machines  of  every  description 
and  kind  have  been  perfected  for  the  arrangement  of 
types  in  form,  but  without  the  guiding  mind  and  hand  of 
the  deft  craftsman  even  they  would  not  function. 

Craftsmanship  can  never  be  overcome  by  mere  ma- 
chines made  of  iron,  steel  and  wood.  Brains,  properly 
applied,  and  deft  fingers  correctly  guided,  can  never  be 
supplanted  by  any  thoughtless  material. 

Anybody  can  buy  and  perhaps  operate  a  typesetting 
machine,  but  brains  and  ability— art  in  typesetting-— comes 
only  through  years  of  training,  practice,  painstaking  care 
and  understanding. 

The  W.  B.  CoNKEY  Company  has  all  the  necessary 

Page  99 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

^fX^^  HMmOMD  NEW  YORK 


madiinciy  and  cip^iiciit,  and  more-they  have  trained 
HBcn  of  understanding  and  ability  who  know  from  expe- 
rience how  to  bring  out  the  best  there  is  in  a  message, 
whether  it  be  in  a  book,  catalog  or  booklet 

Conkey-set  type  is  distinguished  not  alone  by  the  best 
known  available,  bnt  also  by  the  manner  in  wMdi  it 
is  set— tlie  appearance  of  the  finished  prodiict 


Making  Type  Talk 


The  book,  catalog,  or  other  printed  matter  has  com- 
pletely failed  in  its  mission  unless  it  is  read.  It  is  there- 
fore imperative  that  printed  matter  of  every  sort  be  set 
in  an  inviting,  readable  style,  and  the  more  easily  it  can  be 
lead  tiie  better  will  be  the  results. 

Usually  the  sole  object  of  a  catalog,  booklet  or  folder 
18  to  sell  goods— perhaps  to  people  who  are  none  too  will- 
ing to  read  the  message  pertaining  to  them.  This  in- 
difference on  the  part  of  the  reader  can  be  overcome  by 
writing  the  message  in  a  clear,  convincing  manner  cal- 
culated to  get  and  hold  the  attention  of  the  reader,  and 
hy  sdecting  a  suitable  style  of  type  with  an  inviting  ap- 
pearance to  assist  in  delivering  the  message  and  attaining 
the  object  sought.  The  former  lies  entirely  with  the 
author  or  copywriter.  Regarding  the  latter  wc  offer  ^e 
following  suggestions  in  the  selection  of  types. 


m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CMKMGO                      HAMMOND                       NEW  YOMC 

machinery  and  equipment,  and  more— tfiey  have  trained 
men  of  imdcrstanding  and  ability  who  know  from  expe- 
rience how  to  bring  out  the  best  there  is  in  a  message, 
whether  it  be  in  a  book,  catalog  or  booklet. 

Conkey-set  type  is  distinguished  not  alone  by  the  best 
Icnown  types  available,  but  also  by  the  manner  in  which  it 
is  set— the  appearance  of  the  finished  product 

Making  Type  Talk 

The  book,  catalog,  or  other  printed  matter  has  com- 
pletely failed  in  its  mission  unless  it  is  read.  It  is  there- 
fore imperative  that  printed  matter  of  every  sort  be  set 
in  an  inviting,  readable  style,  and  the  more  easily  it  can  be 
read  the  better  will  be  the  results. 

Usually  the  sole  object  of  a  catalog,  booklet  or  folder 
is  to  sdl  goods— perhaps  to  people  who  are  none  too  will- 
ing to  read  the  message  pertaining  to  them.  This  in- 
difference on  the  part  of  the  reader  can  be  overcome  by 
writing  the  message  in  a  clear,  convincing  manner  cal- 
culated to  get  and  hold  the  attention  of  the  reader,  and 
by  selecting  a  suitable  style  of  type  with  an  inviting  ap- 
pearance to  assist  in  delivering  the  message  and  attaining 
the  object  soug^it.  The  former  lies  entirely  with  the 
author  or  copywriter.  Regarding  the  latter  we  offer  the 
following  suggestions  in  the  selection  of  types. 


B«e  100 


K 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY  1 

CHICACO                      HAMMOND                       NEW  YORK 

Do's  AND  Don'ts  in  Type  Selection 


Do  Select  type  adapted  to  your  line— one  that  reflects 
the  product  of  which  it  speaks. 

Don't  Sacrifice  easy  readability  in  an  effort  to  secure 
artistic  effect.  Simplicity  is  the  very  foundation 
of  good  typography. 

Dm*t  Select  a  fancy  type  to  a#M||  heavy  hardware 
or  machinery,  nor  a  heav||||^  to  advertise  a 
line  of  art  goods.  Types  wluch  are  the  most 
legible  are  in  reality  the  most  beautiful. 

Do       Select  type  adapted  to  the  space  it  is  to  fill. 

Dm't  Use  extended  type  for  a  long,  narrow  column 
with  lines  running  the  short  way,  nor  condensed 
type  for  a  long,  narrow  space  with  lines  the  long 
way. 

Do       Select  type  of  the  proper  size  for  your  page. 

Don't  Select  large  type  for  a  small  space,  making  neces- 
sary the  constant  breaking  of  words  and  irregular 
spacing  of  letters,  nor  small  type  to  fill  a  large 
space  requiring  long  lines,  which  are  always  hard 
to  read.  Length  of  line  and  size  of  type  should 
be  in  proportion. 

Do  Emphasize  sparingly  by  use  of  italics  or  bold 
face,  and  only  occasionally  with  a  special  color  of 
ink. 

Don't  Emphasize  too  much!  A  message,  whether  writ- 
ten or  spoken,  if  overemphasized  is  not  empha- 
sized at  an. 


I  ftyifc  jf*^  f  ill 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO                       HAMMOND                        NEW  YORK 

mi 

Do's  AND  Don'ts  in  Type  Selection 

Do  Select  type  adapted  to  your  line— one  that  reflects 
the  product  of  which  it  speaks. 

Don't  Sacrifice  easy  readability  in  an  effort  to  secure 
artistic  effect.  Simplicity  is  the  very  foundation 
of  good  typography. 

Dm't  Select  a  fancy  type  to  advertise  heavy  hardware 
or  machinery,  nor  a  heavy  type  to  advertise  a 
line  of  art  goods.  Types  which  are  the  most 
legible  are  in  reality  the  most  beautiful. 

Do       Select  type  adapted  to  the  space  it  is  to  fill. 

Don'i  Use  extended  type  for  a  long,  narrow  column 
with  lines  running  the  short  way,  nor  condensed 
type  for  a  long,  narrow  space  with  lines  the  long 
way. 

Do       Select  type  of  the  proper  size  for  your  page. 

Don't  Select  large  type  for  a  small  space,  making  neces- 
sary the  constant  breaking  of  words  and  irregular 
spacing  of  letters,  nor  small  type  to  fill  a  large 
space  requiring  long  lines,  which  are  always  hard 
to  read.  Length  of  line  and  size  of  type  should 
be  in  proportion. 

Do  Emphasize  sparingly  by  use  of  italics  or  bold 
face,  and  only  occasionally  with  a  special  color  of 
ink. 

Dm't  Emphasize  too  much !  A  message,  whether  writ- 
ten or  spoken,  if  overemphasized  is  not  empha- 
sized at  all. 


m 


W<  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICACO  HAMMOND 


Dnn'l  Use  ••freakish"  types.  They  mmXiy  draw  atten- 
tkm  to  Hie  type  itself  and  not  to  the  message. 

DofS'l  Ui#  t  large  number  of  styles  or  sizes  of  type  in 
any  one  job.  Less  confusion  and  greater  eflEec- 
tiveness  will  result 


BuAtioN  Bbtwebm  Size  of  Tm  Am 
Length  of  Lihe 

Authorities  differ  as  to  the  proper  length  of  line  best 
adapted  to  the  various  sizes  of  type  in  general  usage. 

The  following  table  shows  about  the  proper  length  of 
ime,  set  solid,  in  ordinary  type  other  than  extended  or 
condensed,  tfaoui^  in  books  kmfer  lines  are  f  requen% 
used. 

6  point  10  picas  wide 

8  point  13  picas  wide 

10  point   .15  picas  wide 

12  point.  21  picas  wide 

14  point  24  picas  wide 

18  point  .  30  picas  wide 


Display  type  should  be  set  in  similar  proportion  to 
the  above. 

Bold  face  type  may  be  set  in  longer  lines  than  light 
face  and  still  be  equally  as  readable. 

If  matter  is  set  leaded,  it  can  be  in  Imes  from 
one  to  three  peas  greater  in  lengdi  without  doing  vblence 
to  tiie  general  readability,  dqiending  upon  the  size. 

104 


i 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKAOO  HAMMOND   NEW  YOMC 

TYPE  MEASUREMENT 


The  Pica 


The  pica  is  to  the  printer  what  the  yard  is  to  a  dry- 
goods  merchant.  It  is  a  linear  unit  of  measurement 
12  points  long,  or  }4  of  an  inch. 


The  Em 


The  em  is  also  a  unit  of  measurement  for  type  based 
on  the  square  of  the  size  of  the  individual  type,  as  a 
6  point  em,  an  8  point  em,  etc.  The  em  is  used  as  a  unit 
of  area  to  detamine  the  amount  of  matter  set  in  a  page 
of  type. 

Typesetting  is  usually  charged  for  on  the  1,000  em 
basis,  i.  e.,  so  much  per  1,000  ems.  The  smaller  the  size 
of  type  the  larger  number  of  cms  there  are  in  the  page. 


The  Point  System 


Type  is  measured  up  and  down,  not  by  width,  when 
reference  is  made  to  type  sizes,  each  size  of  type  being 
designated  according  to  points.  An  inch  of  type  space, 
measured  up  and  down,  contains  72  points. 

By  dividing  72  by  the  size  of  any  type  in  points  we 
find  the  number  of  Unes  of  that  type  which  can  be  set, 

solid,  in  one  inch. 

For  example,  by  dividing  72  by  8  we  find  that  9  lines 
of  8  point  type  can  be  set,  .soHd,  in  a  single  inch. 

Fkge  lOS 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


same  style  of  type  as 

*XjOod  Printing  Brings  Results" 
may  be  made  in  the  same  size,  estimated  in  points.  In 
"oondensed"  lonn  as: 

%ood  Printing  Brings  Results" 

and  also  in  "extended"  form  as: 

These  terms,  "amdensed*'  and  ''eactended,''  are  used  to 
indicate  the  width  only  of  the  type  face. 

For  spacing  between  lines  of  type,  strips  of  metal, 
known  as  "leads,"  are  used.  Those  most  used  vary  in 
thickness  from  one  to  three  points.  When  type  is  set 
without  the  use  of  these,  it  is  said  to  be  "solid" — ^when 
with  them  it  is  leaded/'  The  term  'leaded"  nsualfy 
means  an  opening  of  2  points  between  type  lines.  Thus 
an  8  point  type  "leaded"  would  occupy  the  same  space 
as  a  10  point  type  set  "solid." 

Bearing  in  mind  that  the  term  "leaded"  is  to  be  under- 
stood here  as  meaning  an  opening  of  2  points  between 
type  Hnes,  the  taMt  on  page  111  will  be  found  of  service 
in  indicatii^  the  number  of  words— approximately — 
whicfa  a  square  inch  of  space  will  contain,  set  in  various 
sizes  of  type,  either  leaded  or  solid. 


W#  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CigaiOO  HAMMOND  NEW  YOMC 


ESTIMATING  COMPOSITION 


To  find  the  number  of  ems  in  any  given  page,  set 
solid,  multiply  the  length  of  line  in  picas  by  12  (the 
number  of  points  in  a  pica)  and  divide  by  the  size  of 
type  in  which  the  matter  is  to  be  set  The  result  is  the 
number  of  ems  in  the  line.  Multiply  this  by  the  number 
of  lines  on  the  page  to  get  the  total  number  of  ems  to 
the  {loge. 

Another  method  of  estimating  type  is  to  multiply  the 
length  of  the  line  in  points  (12  points  to  the  pica  or  72 
points  to  the  inch)  by  the  depth  of  the  page  in  points 
to  get  the  number  of  square  points  on  the  page,  and 
divide  by  the  square  of  the  number  of  the  points  in  which 

the  type  is  set. 

For  example— a  page  measuring  4x6  inches  or  24x36 
picas  is  set  in  8  point  type,  how  many  ems  are  there  on 
the  page? 

One  inch  contains  72  points,  therefore  4,  the  number 
of  inches  in  the  width  of  the  page,  X  72  =  288 ;  and  6,  the 
number  of  inches  in  the  depth  of  the  page,  X  72=432. 
432X288=124,416,  the  number  of  square  points  on 
the  page.  Dividing  124,416  by  64  (8X8=64,  the  square 
of  the  size  in  which  the  matter  is  set)=l,944,  the  total 
number  of  ems  on  the  page. 


Page  107 


W.  B,  CONKEY  COMPANY 

NEW  YOUL 


Estimating  Number  of  £ms  in  Any  Given  Copy 


1.  Count  the  words  in  ten  lines  of  copy. 

2.  Divide  result  by  ten  to  ascertain  the  number  oi  words 
in  an  avemgie  line. 

3.  Ascertain  liie  nomber  of  lines  on  an  average  page  of 
copy. 

4.  Multiply  this  sum  by  the  number  of  words  per  line» 
which  gives  the  number  of  words  per  page  of  copy. 

5.  Multiply  this  by  the  number  of  pages  of  copy,  which 
gives  the  total  number  of  words  in  copy. 

6b  Divide  the  number  of  words  of  copy  by  the  number 
of  words  per  1,000  ems  td  tiie  type  it  is  desired  to  use 
as  siiown  in  tiie  table  bdow.  The  result  win  be  the 
total  ntunber  of  ems  in  the  copy. 


HANDY  INFORMATION  ON  TYPE 


Size  of  Type 

Words 
ca 

SoUd 

ual«000 

Square  inches 
in  1,000  ems 

Number  of  ems 
in  1  pound 

5  pomt. ...... 

Xf    UVIU^'.  ...... 

8  pdm..  

it  point.  ...... 

305 
312 
370 
385 
373 
389 

207 
222 
259 
289 
303 
306 

3.91 
6.94 
12.35 
19.29 
23.34 
27.78 

1,024 
576 
324 
207 
171 
144 

The  abofc  figures  are  approximate  and  vary  slightly  with 
diiercnt  ilgto  of  type  lace;  Uusy  are  based  on  the  solid  slug. 


Wm  tit 


w. 

CUKMiO 

B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

HAPHOND               NEW  rmK 

BELATIVE  SIZES  OF  TYPE  IN  EMS 


Ushig  as  a  basis  a  page  containing  1.000  ems  set  m 
12  point,  the  number  of  ems  in  the  same  size  page  m- 
creases  in  proportion  as  the  type  fece  is  reduced  m  size: 

A  page  set  in  12  point  contains  1000  ems. 
The  same  page  set  in  11  point  contmns  1190  cms. 
The  same  page  set  in  10  point  contains  1440  ems. 
The  same  page  set  in  9  point  contains  1778  ems. 
.  The  same  page  set  in  8  point  contains  2250  ems. 
The  same  pa^  set  in  7  point  contains  2939  ems. 
The  same  page  set  m  6  point  contains  4000  ems. 

NUMBER  OF  EMS  TO  RUNNING  INCH 

In  Columns  10  to  30  Picas  Wide   _ 


Cdumn  Width 
in  Picas 


12  pt   Pica 

11  pt...  SmallPw* 
10  pt.  Long  Primer 

9  pt   Bourgeois 

8  pt   Brevier 

7  W   Minion 

6  pt   Noowrea 

Syi  pt.  Afrte 


10 


60 
72 
86 
107 
135 
177 
240 
288 


11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

66 

72 

78 

84 

90 

96 

102 

108 

114 

120 

78 

86 

93 

100 

107 

114 

121 

128 

136 

143 

95 

104 

112 

121 

129 

138 

147 

155 

164 

173 

117 

128 

139 

149 

160 

171 

181 

192 

203 

213 

148 

162 

175 

189 

202 

216 

229 

243 

256 

270 

194 

212 

229 

247 

265 

282 

300 

318 

335 

353 

264 

288 

312 

336 

360 

^84 

408 

432 

456 

480 

[316 

344 

372 

400 

428 

4S6 

484 

512 

544 

S72 

"IT 

22 

23 

24 

"iT 

1  26 

"27" 

"IT 

"29" 

"30 

126 

132 

138 

144 

150 

156 

162 

168 

174 

180 

150 

157 

164 

171 

178 

185 

192 

200 

207 

214 

181 

190 

199 

207 

216 

225 

233 

242 

250 

259 

224 

235 

246 

256 

267 

277 

288 

299 

309 

320 

283 

297 

310 

324 

337 

351 

364 

378 

391 

405 

371 

388 

406 

424 

441 

459 

477 

494 

S12 

529 

504 

528 

552 

576 

600 

624 

648 

672 

696 

720 

600 

628 

656 

684 

712 

740 

768 

800 

828 

9S6 

Olumn  Width  in  Bcas 


12  nt    P>ca 

apt:::.:...  smaii  rc* 

10  pt  Loot  P"nicr 

0  it  Bourgeois 

1  Pt   Brevier 

7  pt   Minion 

6  pt   Nonpareil 

ft   Agate 


Fkge  109 


B.  CONKEY 

COMPANY 

m 

CHICAGO 

HMmomi 

MSVYORK  1 

NUMBER  OF  EMS  IN  SQUARE  INCHES 


Square  Inch 

6pt 

-  7pt 

.  8pt. 

1  9pt 

10  pi 

t.  11  pt 

.  12  pt 

1  

144 

loe 

i  81 

I-  52 

'  oo 

2  

288 

212 

•  162 

12^ 

\  104 

I- 

i  77 

3   

432 

318 

243 

192 

\  156 

4..  

576 

424 

324 

25^ 

\  208 

720 

530 

405 

320 

\  260 

1  21'5 

X.CKJ 

6  

864 

636 

486 

384 

312 

7  

1008 

742 

567 

448 

364 

Ov/l 

8  

1152 

848 

648 

512 

416 

OtO 

99SI 
^oO 

9  

1296 

954 

729 

576 

468 

OJSrr 

10 

1440 

1060 

810 

640 

520 

430 

360 

11 

A« a  ........  . 

1  COA 

1584 

1166 

961 

704 

572 

473 

396 

12 

1728 

1272 

972 

•768 

624 

516 

432 

1872 

1378 

1053 

832 

676 

559 

468 

14  

2016 

1484 

1134 

896 

728 

602 

504 

IS  

2160 

1590 

1215 

960 

780 

645 

540 

16  

2304 

1696 

1296 

1024 

832 

688 

576 

17. «••........ 

2448 

1802 

1377 

1088 

884 

733 

612 

2592 

1908 

1458 

1152 

936 

776 

648 

19  : 

2736 

2014 

1539 

1216 

988 

819 

684 

20.  : 

2880 

2120 

1620 

1280 

1040 

862 

720 

21  : 

mi 

2226 

1701 

1344 

1092 

905 

756 

22  : 

5168 

2332 

1782 

1408 

1144 

948 

792 

23  : 

J312 

2438 

1863 

1472 

1196 

991 

828 

24  : 

;456 

2544 

1944 

1536 

1248 

1034 

864 

25..   ^ 

;600 

2650 

2025 

1600 

1300 

1077 

900 

Face  110 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CmCACO  HUmOND  NEW  tURK 


WORDS  TO  THE  SQUARE  INCH 


5  point,  leaded. ....... .50 

5  point,  solid  69 

6  point,  leaded  34 

6  point,  solid  47 

7  point,  leaded  27 

7  point,  solid  38 

8  point,  leaded  23 

8  point,  solid.  32 

9  point,  leaded  21 


9  point,  solid  28 

10  point,  leaded  16 

10  point,  solid  21 

11  point,  leaded  14 

11  point,  solid  *  .17 

12  point,  leaded   .11 

12  point,  solid   .14 

14  point,  solid.  11 

18  point,  solid   7 


MEASUREMENT  OF  COMPOSITION  SET  IN 
STANDARD  BOOK  MEASURES 

Table  showing  the  ntimber  of  ems  to  a  line,  and  the 
niiinber  of  lines  contained  in  1000  ems  of  matter,  standard 
book  measures.  Also  the  space,  in  inches,  filled  by  1000 
ems  of  matter  in  the  different  measures. 


21  Ems  Pica 

23  Kms  Pica 

25  Ems  Pica 

SIZE  OF 

No. 

No. 

No. 

No. 

No. 

No. 

No. 

No. 

No. 

TYPE 

ems 

lines 

ins. 

ems 

lines 

ins. 

ems 

lines 

ins. 

in  a 

1000 

1000 

in  a 

1000 

1000 

in  a 

1000 

1000 

line 

ems 

ems 

line 

ems 

ems 

line 

ems 

ems 

6  point. . . 

42 

24 

2 

46 

215^ 

50 

20 

1% 

8  point. . . 

315^ 

32^ 

35 

285^ 

354 

37^ 

3 

10  point . . . 

2554 

395^ 

27H 

36 

5 

30 

33H 

11  point... 

23 

43^ 

25 

40 

2754 

5^ 

12  point . . . 

21 

48 

8 

23 

43^ 

m 

25 

40 

6JS 

Flags  111 


1  iH^^^l 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMFANY 

CHKSCa                     UAMMOMD                      MBir  YOKK 

IP 

la 

PROOF-READER'S  MASKS 

These  marks  are  in  universal  use,  and  not  only  save 
the  time  which  would  be  required  to  explain  corrections 
in  writing,  but  also  are  best  adapted  to  the  limited  amomit 
of  space  availaUe  on  the  avenge  proof -sheet  for  come- 
taons. 

When  proof  contains  a  nnmher  of  errors,  draw  a  line 
from  each  mark  in  the  type  to  a  corresponding  mark  in 
tiiemai^. 

Read  all  proof-sheets  carefully,  especially  for  names, 
addresses,  technical  terms,  and  grammatical  construction. 
Often,  when  a  proof  is  not  read  attentively,  errors  will 
he  overlooked,  and  once  a  final  proof  has  been  returned 
these  cannot  he  remedied. 

Return  the  original  copy  with  the  proof  and  mark 
•t).  K.**  or  **0.  K.  with  Corrections,"  as  the  case  may  be. 
Sign  your  name  also  to  each  proof-sheet  you  correct,  in 
order  that  the  printer  may  know  it  has  been  read  by  the 
proper  person. 

If  you  desire  that  revised  proofs  he  sent  you,  after 
corrections  have  been  made,  make  a  note  of  this  on  the 
corrected  proof  also. 

Do  not  send  whal  explanations  by  messenger. 


W.  B,  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO                       HAMMOND                        NEW  YORK 

PROOF-READERS'  MARKS 


X 

dwnge  bad  letter 

1 

V 

Superior  figure 

J. 

Rnh  down  apace 

Inferior  %ure 

9 

Turn  over 

for] 

Moveo\-er 

9i 

(?) 

A 

Left  out;  insert 

OHl,  «.  C. 

Out.  see  copy 

f 

O 

Enii]uad  space 

V 

Even  spacirig 

One-«n  dash 

Two-em  dash 

Close  up  entirely 

Paragraph 

Raise 

No  paragraph 

Lower 

m.f. 

Wrong  font 

iff 

Scrai^iten  liim 

Let  it  stand 

O 

Period 

<ltf. 

Let  it  stand 

•/ 

Comira 

». 

Tnnupose 

«/ 

Colon 

Capitalktters 

1/ 

AiC. 

Small  capa 

Lc. 

Lowercase 

Roman 

Page  113 


B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO  HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


PROOF,  SHOWING  CORRECTIONS 

JUtlfta^OtigSinuising  letter  frooi  Mr.T.  B. 
^   /Qdrich  to  Prof.  E.  S.  Morse,  ex- 
president  of  tj(e  American  Academy  ^ 

/Advancement  of  Science,  follows: 
Prof?^ors^i^hould^be  ^toted,  ♦••••^If' 
lias  a  handwriting  quitie  iiiciescril>- 
^abky^Mj  dear  Moiae:  It  jfm  very 
pleasantfor  me  to  get  a  letter  from 
you^tHeK^i^ay.  Perhap^  should:;/j|: 
^ykave  foundit  pleasanter  if  I  had 

been  able  to  decipher      1  don't  Op 
JL,  thinldp  mastered  an^jing  bevond  m# 
the  date  (which  I  knew),  and  the 
s^nature  (which  I  guessed  at).  v» 
There's  a  singu/ar  and  perpetual 
charm  m  a  letter  of  yonryfir  never  i/ 
41b  pmvs  old;  It  nevnioses  its  novelty.  ' 

^  lT)ne  can  say  to  one's  self  every 
-  Q  mommg  /  *  There's  that  letter  of 
Wh    fHorses;  lhavcn't  j;gd  it  yet./-l  O 
^     think  Il|^^anothei£k^at  it  to- 
*  ^  day  and  maybe  I  shall  be  able»  in  ^ 
m»|BWiffiOT  of  a  lew  y^^frs,  to  make 
C  oj)t  i{f  at  he  means  by  those  t's  that 
like  w^y  and  those  i's  that 
^^*»./4iaven*t  mmbrewsl^  Other  le^ 
jC  ate  reaoUand  forgotten,  but 

*^ur8  arc  lyept  forever— unread. 


will  Jast  a  reasonable 
^  Admiringly  yours. 


Page  114 


SPECIMEN  TYPE 
PAGES 


liiiiiliiiiiiB 


W.  B,  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICACO  HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


SPECIMEN  TYPE  PAGES 

OUR  plant  is  equipped  with  many  linotype  machines 
which  produce  the  highest  grade  of  book  and  catalog 
work  at  an  enormous  saving  in  time  and  money.  These 
are  handled  by  skilled  operators,  whose  work  reaches  a 
degree  of  perfection  rarely  attained  by  hand  composition. 
We  also  employ  type-casting  machines — ^thus  placing  at 
the  disposal  of  our  customers  all  the  new,  clear  type  faces 
that  are  practical  for  our  use. 

Type  once  used  in  printing  is  immediately  thrown  in 
our  melting  pot  and  new  type  recast  from  it,  thus  insuring 
clear,  sharp  type  in  every  job,  as  type  once  on  the  press 
is  more  or  less  defaced  and  the  sharpness  of  the  letter 
injured. 

All  matter  passing  through  our  G)mposing  Room 
has  at  least  two  readings  with  complete  revises,  and  if 
it  is  technical  matter  it  is  read  from  three  to  five  times, 
thus  insuring  absolute  accuracy. 

Our  display  men  are  skilled  craftsmen,  trained  by 
long  experience  to  bring  out  the  latest  and  best  results 
in  display  and  book  composition ;  as  a  result  the  finished 
books  are  as  pleasing  to  the  eye  and  as  economical  in 
production  as  possible. 

It  is  impossible  in  a  book  of  this  size,  neither  is  it 
necessary,  to  show  more  than  a  very  few  of  the  great 
number  of  type  styles  in  constant  use  in  our  Composing 
Room.  Those  shown  on  the  following  pages  are  amongst 
the  best  and  most  generally  used  in  book  and  catalog 
composition.  nj 


mi 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 
aaaico               hamiiond               new  yoml 

•  9mm  Old  Slyl*  mA  Smll  Cam  aad  Itilie 

Vwii  i»  tfM  MMM  ftMh  Mt  MUi  31.  iHllli  2S 

Ofi#  sbi§k  Uumgki  or  idea  ptainty  and  ftmStfy  expressed 
it  man  pomt  tim  oaagr  tmt  vaguely  told.  Types  were  made 
to  serve  as  a  mediam  lor  conveying  tlioai^  and  ideas  from 
one  mind  to  another,  and  in  oar  printed  expressions,  no  less 
tiian  oar  spoken  bngnagc^  <fiplomaqr  most  tie  practiced. 

The  tone  and  inlifctioii  of  tiie  homan  vckt  may  aid  or  bin- 
der  the  attainment  of  success  in  the  things  attempted.  Cor- 
responding exactly  with  these  tones  and  mfiections  of  the  voice 
is  the  wide  variety  of  styles  and  sizes  in  type  osed  for  print- 
ing. As  the  tone  of  the  voice  is  of  prime  in^ortance  in  mak- 
ing favorable  first  impressions,  so  also  is  there  a  certain  type 
adapted  to  each  idea,  capable  of  producing  a  favorable  im- 
pression on  the  mind  of  your  reader  preparing  him  for  the 
thought  you  want  to  plant 

This  is  a  day  of  superlatives,  when  the  best  goods,  the 

best  service,  the  best  of  everything  wins — after  they  have  been 

demonstrated  as  best  The  Concern  who  tells  the  world  about 
their  prodnct  or  service  in  a  dear,  forcible  and  pleasing  man- 
ner has  alrody  started  climbing  on  the  road  to  success.  In 

this  connection  Conkey  Service,  backed  by  the  experience  of 
nearly  fifty  years  in  type  setting  and  arrangement  can  lend 
vital  assistance. 

Conkey-set  type  is  distinguished  not  alone  by  the  best  known 
^rpes  available,  but  also  by  the  manner  in  which  it  is  set-* 
me  appearance  of  the  finished  product. 

It  is  true  that  machines  of  every  description  and  kind  have 
been  perfected  tor  1^  arrangement  of  types  in  form,  bat 
without  the  guiding  mind  and  hand  of  the  deft  craftsman  tbor 
would  not  function.  Craftsmanship  can  never  be  overcome  by 
mere  machines  made  of  iron,  steel  and  wood.  Brains,  properly 
i^phed,  and  deft  fingers  correctly  guided,  can  never  be  sup- 
piamted  by  any  thoughtless  matenat 

Art  is  simply  the  act  of  creating  beauty.    Art  in  typeset- 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR 

abcdef  ghi  j  klmnopqrstuvwxyz  ahcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 

1234667890         smaix  caps  12345^7890  1234567890 
Fkte  118 


i 

B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO                       HAMMOND                        NEW  YOaK 

8  point  Old  Style  with  Antique 
Words  to  tho  •qooro  iaoh  lot  solid  32,  loaded  23 

One  iincle  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  expressed 
is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told.  Types  were 
made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying  thoughts  and  ideas 
from  one  mind  to  another,  and  in  our  printed  expressions, 
no  less  than  onr  spoken  language,  diplomacy  most  be  prac- 
ticed. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voice  may  aid  or 
hinder  the  attainment  of  success  in  the  things  attempted. 
Corresponding  exactly  with  these  tones  and  inflections  of 
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxy  abcdeighijklmnopqrstuvwxy 
1234567890  1234Si7890 


8  point  Old  Style  Antique  (Single  Letter) 
Words  to  the  Bquare  inch  set  solid  32,  leaded  23 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  expressed 
is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told.  Types  were 
made  tO'  lenre  aa  a  medium  foiilliieyine  thoughts  and 
ideas  from  one  mind  to  another,  and  in  our  printed  expreS" 
sions,  no  less  than  our  spoken  language,  diplomacy  must  be 
practiced. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voice  may  aid  or 
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOiP  abcdefghijUmnopqnituvwz 
123456:^  sa345678SK» 

9  point  Old  Style  with  Small  Caps  and  Italic 
WfHrds  to  Ibo  sqoaro  iaoli  set  solid  28,  lesdod  21 


Om  single  thoughi  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  expressed 
is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told.  Tjrpes  were 
made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying  thoughts  and 
ideas  from  one  mind  to  another,  and  in  our  printed  expres- 
sions, no  less  than  our  spoken  language,  diplomacy  must  be 
practiced. 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP 
abcdef  ghi  jklnmopqrstuvwx  '  ahcdefghijklmnopqrstuvws 

1234567890  SMALL  CAPS  MSiS^fBgO 

119 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


10  point  Old  Style  with  Small  Caps  and  Italic 
Words  to  the  sqoare  inch  set  solid  21,  leaded  16 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  ex- 
pnastd  is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told. 
Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying 
tiioi^;lils  and  ideas  from  one  mind  to  another,  and  in 
our  printed  expressions,  no  less  than  our  spoken  lan- 
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO 
alicdefghijklmnuopqrsltivw  abcdefghijkhnnopqrstuvw 
12S4I»67890  SMALL  caps  12345^7^90 

!•  poiiit  OM  Style  witii  Aati<pe 
Ww*  to  the  aqnra  imdk  Mt  eoHd  21,  kfied  li 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly 
expressed  is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told. 
Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying 
thoughts  and  ideas  from  one  mind  to  another,  and 
in  our  printed  expressions,  no  less  than  our  spoken 
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO 
abcdef  ^hi  i  klmnopqrstuv  abcdefghijkUnnopqrstuv 
1234567890  1234567890 

11  fiiirt  OM  Siffo  with  Smit  Cam  haB» 
Wvffii  to  Iht  SMsri  Itoh  Ml  wBd  lH  Mii  li 


One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly 
expressed  is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told. 
Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying 
thoughts  and  ideas  from  one  mind  to  another,  and  in 
our  printed  expressions,  no  less  than  our  spoken  lan- 
guage, diplomacy  must  be  practiced. 
ABCDEFGfflJKLMN  ABCDEFGHIJKLMN 
alxxicfghijklmnopqrstmr  abcdefghijktmnopqrstw 
1234567890  1234567890  small  caps  123456789^ 


1        W.  B. 

CONKEY 

COMPANY 

]  CHKACO 

HAMMOND 

NEW  YOBK 

10  point  Old  Style  with  Small  Capi  and  Italk 
Wtovb  to  iMfc  MC  Mild  21,  iwM  16 


One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  ex- 
pressed is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told. 
Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying 
thoughts  and  ideas  from  one  mind  to  another,  and  in 
our  printed  expressions,  no  less  than  our  ^ken  lan- 
guage, diplomacy  must  be  practiced. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voice  may  aid 
or  hinder  the  attainment  of  success  in  the  things  at- 
tempted. Corresponding  exactly  with  these  tones  and 
inflections  of  the  voice  is  the  wide  variety  of  styles  and 
sizes  in  type  used  for  printing.  As  the  tone  of  the  voice 
is  of  prime  importance  in  making  favorable  first  im- 
pressions, so  also  is  there  a  certain  type  adapted  to 
each  idea,  capable  of  producing  a  favorable  impression 
on  the  mind  of  your  reader  preparing  him  for  the 
thought  you  want  to  plant. 

This  is  a  day  of  superlatives,  when  the  best  goods, 
the  best  service,  the  best  of  everything  wins — ^after  they 
have  been  demonstrated  as  best.  The  Concern  who 
tells  the  world  about  their  product  or  service  in  a  clear, 
forcible  and  pleasing  manner  has  already  started  climb- 
ing on  the  road  to  success.  In  this  connection  Conkey 
Service,  backed  by  the  experience  of  nearly  fifty  years 
in  t3rpe  setting  and  arrangement,  can  lend  vital  assist- 
ance. 

Conkey-set  type  is  distinguished  not  alone  by  the 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO 
abode  fghij  klmnopqrstuv  w  abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw 
1234567890  SMALL  CAPS  1234567890 

Page  121 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKACO  HAMMOND  MEW  VOMC 


11  poiat  Old  Style  with  Antiqw 
Wwtii  to  «•  tvMPt  iMh  Ml  Miii  17,  ImM  14 

Ckae  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly 
eacpressed  is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely 
told.  Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for 
conveying  thoughts  and  ideas  from  one  mind  to 
another,  and  in  our  printed  expressions,  no  less 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMN  ABCDEFGHIJKLMN 
abcdefghijkhnnopqrstii  abodefs^jUmnopqrstii 
1234567890  1234567890 

12  point  OM  9tfU  widi  Aadqw 

Mt  Miy  14,  imm  11 


One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and 
forcibly  expressed  is  more  potent  than  many 
but  vaguely  told.  Types  were  made  to  serve 
as  a  medium  for  conveying  thoughts  and  ideas 

ABCDEFGHTJKL  ABCDEFGHIJKL 
abcdefghijklmnopqrst  abcdefghijklmnopqrst 
1234567890  1234567890 


12  pMBt  Gnkm  Old  Style  with  Small  Caps  and  Italic 
Ward*  to  th«  iqaare  inch  set  aolid  14,  leaded  11 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forci- 
bly expressed  is  more  potent  than  many  but 
vaguely  told.  Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a 
medium  for  conveying  thoughts  and  ideas  from 

ABCDEFGHIJKL  ABCDEFGHIJKIj 
abcdefghijklmnopqrs  abcdefghijklmnopqrs 

1234567890        SMALL  CAPS  12 34S6789O 


i 

B*  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKACO                     HAimOND                      MEW  VOKK 

8  poiat  Modem  witli  Small  Gaps  wd  Italie 
Waeda  ta  Aa  tqaara  iaih  aat  aalM  32t  laaiai  23 

One  tln^gle  thov^fnt  or  idea  plainly  and  f ofeiblj  ezpresaed  la 
moro  potent  than  many  but  vagfuely  told.  Types  were  made  to 
eerve  as  a  medium  for  conveying  thoughts  and  ideas  from  one 
mind  to  another,  and  in  our  printed  expressions,  no  less  than  our 
spoken  language,  diplomacy  must  be  practiced. 

The  tone  and  inlleetion  of  tie  human  voioe  may  aid  or  hinder 
the  attainment  of  success  in  the  things  attempted.  Corresponding 
exactly  with  these  tones  and  inflections  of  the  voice  is  the  wide 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQB 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwi^z  abcdefghijklmmpqratuvwxys 
1234567890  SMALL  OAPS  m4S67890 


8  point  Modem  with  Bold  Face 
Wards  ta  tka  mpMwa  iadi  tat  ■alt4  31,  laadad  22 

One  single  thoni^t  or  idea  plainly  and  foreibly  expressed 
is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told.  Types  were 
made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying  thoughts  and  ideas 
from  one  mind  to  anotl&er,  and  in  our  printed  expressions* 
no  less  than  our  siioken  langnage,  diplomacy  mnst  be  pnie- 
ticed. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voice  may  aid  or 
liinder  the  attainment  of  suocess  in  Jba^tliingB  attempted. 

ABGDBFOHIJKLMNOPQB  jraHm 
abcdefghijklnmopQrsliivwz  alMiBQBlklmnopqrstuvwz 
1234567890  1284067800 


8  point  Medeni  widk  Ax^qpm 

la  iIm  aqaara  iMh  aat  taWi  82,  laaiad  23 


Om  siligle  Humdtbfe  or  idea  plainly  and  foreibly  expressed  is 
more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told.  Types  were  made 
to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying  thoughts  and  ideas  from 
one  mind  to  another,  and  in  our  printed  expressions,  no  less 
than  our  spoken  language,  diplomacy  must  be  practiced. 
'  The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voiee  may  aid  or  hin- 
der the  attainment  of  success  in  the  things  attempted.  Cor- 

ABCDEF6HIJKLMN0PQB  ABCDEFOHUELMNOPQB 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxy  abcdafghiJklmnopqrstuTWxy 
1284567890  1234567890 

123 


Gotki« 

Om  slngl*  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  eiprowed 
la  iMNre  potent  tluui  many  Irat  Taguely  told.  Types  were 
made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying  thoughts  and  ideas 
from  one  mind  to  another,  and  in  our  printed  expressions* 
no  less  than  our  spoken  language,  diplomacy  must  be  prao- 

tiC6d. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voice  may  aid  or 
kinder  the  attainment  of  success  in  the  things  attempted. 
Corresponding  exactly  with  these  tones  and  inflections  of  the 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR 
obedothliijklmiiopqntaywzy  abedefghijklmnopqrstuvwxy 
ItSiSiTSM  t2846«?9M 

widk  Snail  dps  wmi  htM» 
iMh  Mt  Mtti  2B,  UM  n 


One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  expressed 
ia  more  potent  than  many  but  vagiiely  told.  Types  were  made 
to  servo  as  *  medinm  for  ooDveying  thoughts  and  ideas  from 
one  mind  to  anolliery  and  in  our  printed  caq^^ressioiMiy  no  less 
Hum  our  spolun  language,  diplomacy  must  do  praetieed. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voice  may  aid  or 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ 
abcdef  gh  i  j  klmnopqratavwxy  abedefghijklmnopqrstuvwxy 
1234567890  bmall  gaps  1234S67890 


W«*  m  mm  tsMM  in*  Ml  mU  27, 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  expressed 
ia  mora  potent  thim  many  Imt  Taguely  told.  Types  wore 
made  to  servo  as  a  medium  for  eonveying  tlionglits  and  ideas 
firom  one  mind  to  anothar,  ^  printed  expressions, 
no  less  tlum  our  apokon  langnago^  dq>lomai^  most  be  prao- 
tieed. 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQ 
abcdefghijklnmopqrstuvwx  abcdefghijWmnopqrstnvwx 
1234567890  1234567890 


B.  CONKEY 

COMPANY 

cHiaifio 

HAMMOND 

MEW  YOaK 

E 


10  point  Modern  wi^  Small  Gaps  aad  ItaUe 

Words  to  the  square  inch  tet  iblid  21,  kadsi  1« 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  ex- 
pressed is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told. 
Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  eonveying 
thoughts  and  ideas  from  one  mind  to  another,  aiid 
in  our  printed  expressions,  no  less  than  our  spoken 
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN  ABCDEFGHIJKLMN 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstu  abcdefghijklmnopqrstu 
1234567890  small  caps  1234567890 

10  point  Modem  widi  Antique 
Wttrdt  t»  fha  •dMi*  iadi  Mt  toiid  21,  Iwded  16 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  ex- 
pressed is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told. 
Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying 
thoughts  and  ideas  from  one  mind  to  another,  and  in 
our  printed  expressions,  no  less  than  our  spoken 
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  ABCDEFOHUKUWO 

abcdefghijklmnopqrstu  *^^®^«f^J^^5S?£SSS 
1234567890 

11  point  Modern  with  Small  Caps  and  Italic 
Words  t»  th*  tqwu*  iach  set  solid  17,  leaded  14 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly 
expressed  is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely 
told.  Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  naedium  for 
conveying  thoughts  and  ideas  from  one  mmd  to 
another,  and  in  our  printed  expressions,  no  less 
than  our  spoken  language,  diplomacy  must  be 

ABCDEFGHUK  A^^W^F"^^ 
abcdefghijktamop  ""^^^^fi^'i^lT^^^ 
1234567890  bmauu  caps  1234567890 

Page  12S 


W.  B,  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CmfiO  IHMUniiB  MSW  YOBK 


10  point  Modern  with  Small  Caps  and  Italic 
Words  to  the  square  inch  set  solid  21,  iwdtd  16 

One  tingU  thaugki  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  ex- 
prased  is  more  poloit  than  many  but  vaguely  told. 
^Vpes  were  made  to  aenre  as  a  medium  for  conveying 
tionglits  and  ideas  from  one  mind  to  another,  and  in  our 
printed  expressions,  no  less  than  our  spoken  language, 
diplomacy  must  be  practiced. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  buman  iroiee  may 
aid  or  binder  the  attainment  of  snccess  in  the  things 
attempted.  €k»rreq[Mmding  exaetJy  with  these  tones  and 
inieetions  of  the  voiee  is  the  wide  variety  of  styles  and 
siaes  in  type  used  for  printing.  As  the  tone  of  the  voice 
is  of  prime  importance  in  making  favorable  first  impres- 
sions, so  also  is  there  a  certain  type  adapted  to  each 
idea,  capable  of  producing  a  favorable  impression  on 
the  mind  of  your  reader  preparing  him  for  the  thought 
you  want  to  plant. 

This  is  a  day  of  superlatives,  when  the  hesi  goods, 
the  best  service,  the  best  of  everything  wins--after  they 
have  been  demonstrated  as  best.  The  Concern  who  tdh 
the  world  about  their  product  or  service  in  a  clear,  forci- 
ble and  pleasing  manner  has  already  started  climbing 
on  the  road  to  success.  In  this  connection  Conkey  Ser- 
vice, backed  by  the  experience  of  nearly  fifty  years  in 
type  setting  and  arrangement,  can  lend  vital  assistance. 

CSonkey-set  type  is  distinguished  not  alone  by  the  best 
known  types  available,  but  also  by  the  manner  in  which 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMN  ABCDEPQHIJKLMN 
1234567890  muUs  om  lM3^78$a 


B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHiaifiO  MMIMOND  NEW 


8  point  B«doai  with  Small  Gaps  tad  Italic 
Words  to  til*  •qonro  iMh  Mt  aoiid  28»  loadod  21 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  expresaed  U 
more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told.  Types  were  made  to 
terve  as  a  medium  for  conveying  thoughts  and  ideas  from  one 
mind  to  another,  and  in  our  printed  expressions,  no  less  than  our 
spoken  language,  diplomacy  must  be  practiced. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  vnice  may  aid  or  hinder 
the  attainment  of  success  in  the  things  attempted.  Corresponding 
exactly  with  these  tones  and  inflections  of  the  voice  is  the  wide 
variety  of  styles  and  sizes  in  type  used  for  printing.  As  the  tone 
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  ABCDEFGHIJKIMNOPQR 
abcdefghijkhnnopqrstuvwxy  ^d^l^fl'^Pffli^JSlk 
1234S67890  SMAISL  caw  lZS4^7WfO 

10  point  Bodoni  with  Small  Caps  and  Italie 
Wordf  to  the  square  llii  itft  tolid  18,  leaded  16 

One  mgle  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly 
expressed  is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told. 
Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying 
thoughts  and  ideas  from  one  mind  to  another,  and  in 
our  printed  expressions,  no  less  than  our  spoken  lan- 
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw  abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw 
1234567890  small  caps  1234567890 

12  point  Bodoni  with  Small  Gaps  and  Italie 
Wwds  te  tlM  a««sve  laA  aeC  adid  IS,  leaded  12 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly 
expressed  is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely 
tolcL  Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for 
conveying  thou^ts  and  ideas  from  one  mind  to 
ABCDEFGHIJKLMN  ABCDEFGHIJKLMN 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstu  abcdefghijklmnopqrstu 
1234567890         small  caps  1234567890 

Page  127 


m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CMClfiO                    HMOMIO                     NEW  VOBK 

10  point  No.  16  with  Small  Caps  and  Italic 
Words  to  the  square  inch  set  solid  20,  leaded  15 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly 
expressed  is  more  potent  than  maigr  but  vaguely 
told,  l^pes  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for 
eonveying  thoughts  and  ideas  from  one  mind  to 
another,  and  in  our  printed  expressions,  no  less 
than  our  spoken  language,  diplomacy  must  be 
practiced. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voice 
may  aid  or  hinder  the  attainment  of  success  in 
the  things  attempted.  Corresponding  exactly  with 
these  tones  and  inflections  of  the  voice  is  the  wide 
variety  of  styles  and  sizes  in  type  used  for  print- 
ing. As  the  tone  of  the  voice  is  of  prime  impor- 
tance in  maidng  f avwaUe  first  impressions,  so 
also  is  there  a  certain  type  adapted  to  each  idea, 
capable  of  producing  a  favorable  impression  on 
the  mind  of  your  reader  preparing  him  for  the 
thoigdit  you  want  to  plant 

Tlis  is  a  day  of  superlatives,  when  the  best 
goods,  the  best  service,  the  best  of  everything 
wins— after  they  have  been  demonstrated  as  best 
The  Concern  who  telis  the  world  about  their  prod- 
uct or  service  in  a  clear,  forcible  and  pleasing 
manner  has  already  started  climbing  on  the  road 
to  success.   In  this  connection  Conkey  Service, 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO  ABCDEFGHUKLMNO 
abcdefghijklmnopqrst  abcdefghiiklmnopqrst 
1234567890  aii all  caps  12S4567m 

FSiCe  128 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKAQO                    mMMONII                     NEW  YORK 

12  poiiit  Scotch  with  Small  Gapt  and  Italia 
W«rds  to  the  fqure  imIi  wt  lolid  14,  ImM  11 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forci- 
bly expressed  is  more  potent  than  many  but 
vaguely  told.  Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a 
medium  for  conveying  thoughts  and  ideas  from 
one  mind  to  another,  and  in  our  printed  expres- 
sions, no  less  than  our  spoken  language,  diplo- 
macy must  be  practiced; 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voice 

may  aid  or  hinder  the  attainment  of  success  in 

the  things  attempted.    Corresponding  exactly 

with  these  tones  and  inflections  of  the  voice  is 

the  wide  variety  of  styles  and  sizes  in  type  used 

for  printing.  As  the  tone  of  the  voice  is  of  prime 

importance  in  making  favorable  first  impres- 
sions, so  also  is  there  a  certain  type  adapted  to 
each  idea,  capable  of  producing  a  favorable  im- 
pression on  the  mind  of  your  reader  preparing 
him  for  the  thought  you  want  to  plant. 

This  is  a  day  of  superlatives,  when  the  best 
goods,  the  best  service,  the  best  of  everjrthing 
wins — ^af  ter  they  have  been  demonstrated  as  best. 

ABCDEFGHIJKL  ABCDEFGHIJKL 
abcdef ghi  j  klmnopqrs  ahcdefghijklmnopqrs 
1234567890         small  caps  1234^67890 

Page  129 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


OM  Styit  wkk  Sorall  Gtap*  and 

One  scmie  iJ^omAl  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  exprttacd  is  more 
potent  than  mumy  bat  vagndy  loM.   Types  were  Bade  to  serve  as  a 


medium  for  comcyiag  tho«el*  and  ideas  hmt  ene  miiid  to  aaodieff^ 

ressMM»  m  km  than  oar  ipokai  laagMte^  dipio- 


and  in  our  printed 
macy  must  be  practiced. 

^"^^^^^t/^""^  ^  4*  kBMi  voice  may  aid  or  hinder  the 
aWainmrnt  Mllli|H|^     At  ifwrigii  aMaaptod.    Comspomfiag  aaacdy 

ABCDEFGHOflJ^IOPqRS  ABCDEFCHIJKLMNOPQRS 
abcdefghijklmuupiimafwiyt  «iUd^MymnopqTstttt>nM 
1234567890  mu.  cm 

10  point  Cheltenham  Old  Style  with  Small  Caps  and  Italia 
Words  to  the  square  inch  set  solid  22,  leaded  17 

One  mgh  iMgfcl  or  idea  plainly  and  fordbly  dprened 
it  more  potent  than  inaay  but  vagii^y  txJd.  Types  were  made 
to  serve  as  a  medhna  lor  umfcyiug  dioii^bts  and  ideas  ^tom 
one  mmd  to  another,  and  in  our  printed  eq»essions,  no  less 
dian  our  spoken  language,  diplonacy  must  be  prac^ced. 

ABCDEFGHIJiCLMNO  ABCDEFCHIJKLMNO 
abcdefghijklmnopqnlnvwiy  tAcdrfgMjkfmnofiqrstwfiPx^ 
1254567890  small  caps  1234567B90 


n  pate  OialtenhaBi  OM  Styla  wkli  SoMdl  Gaps  and  ftafia 
WeiiB  to  lie  aaam  iask  sat  solid  18»  Mai  12 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly 
expressed  is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told. 
Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  fur  convey- 
ing tliou|jhs  and  ideas  feom  cue  nund  to  anodier,  and 

ABCDEFGHIJKLM  ABCDEFCHIJKLM 

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv  abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv 

1234567890        small  caps  1234567890 


130 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CnCACO  HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


12  point  Cheltenham  Old  Style  with  Small  Caps  and  Itali 
Words  to  the  square  inch  set  solid  15,  lesded  12 

One  smgie  thaughi  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  ex- 
inressed  is  more  potent  iian  many  but  vaguely  told. 
Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying 
tfaouslits  and  icieas  from  one  mind  to  anotber,  and  in 
our  printed  expressions,  no  less  than  our  spoken  lan- 
guage, diplomacy  must  be  practiced. 

The  tone  and  inflecticm  of  the  human  voice  may  aid 
or  hinder  the  attainment  of  success  in  the  things  at- 
tempted. G)rresponding  exactly  with  these  tones  and 
inflectiims  of  the  voice  is  the  wide  varkty  of  styles  and 
rizes  in  type  used  for  printing.  As  the  tone  of  the  voice 

is  of  prime  importance  in  making  favorable  first  im- 
pressions, so  also  is  there  a  certain  type  adapted  to 
each  idea,  capable  of  ppoduckg  a  favorable  impression 
on  the  mind  of  your  reader  prqiarmg  him  for  die 
thought  you  want  to  plant. 

This  is  a  day  of  superlatives,  when  the  best  goods, 
the  best  service,  the  best  of  everything  wins — after  they 
have  been  demonstrated  as  best.  The  G>ncem  who 
tells  the  world  about  their  product  or  service  in  a  clear, 
forcible  and  {^easing  mannar  has  already  started  climb- 
ing on  die  road  to  success.  In  this  connection  Ccnkey 

ABCDEFGHIJKLM  ABCDEFCHIJKLM 

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv  abcdefghijklmnopqrstup 

1234567890        small  caps  1234567890 


I 


m 

IP 

m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 
cwcm               HAMMaMD  wcmimK 

8  point  Cheltenham  Wide  with  Cheltenham  Bold 
Words  to  the  square  inch  tct  solid  32,  leaded  23 

One  single  thoaght  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  expressed 
itt  more  potent  than  naany  but  vaguely  told.  Types  were  made 
to  mmnm  m  m  wamSnm  Imr  conveying  thoughts  and  i«ieas  from 
MM  waSmd  to  anotlMrt  aadi  in  our  printodl  esproesioiis,  no  lose 
tilnn  our  spoken  language,  diplomacy  must  be  practiced. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voice  may  aid  or 
luader  the  attainment  of  success  in  the  things  attempted.  Cor- 
■oqiiiiiiiiiiig  oaucdy  ifilk  these  tonot  and  ittfioctiofw  of 

ABCDEFCHlJiajMOPQRS  ABCDEF€liUiajilNOPWS 

abcdefghijklmnopqrctavwiqr  ■jifidrfghMliH  pgrstuvwxy 

1234567890  1234587880 

18  poiBt  rhmltiirfi—  Wy»  with  ChtlffBhMii  Bold 
Wstds  ts  the  sf  ars  ieak  sst  ssKd  21,  ksdsi  16 

Okie  tingle  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibljr 
expressed  is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told. 
Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  for  conveying 
tiboaslits  and  ideas  horn  one  mind  to  another,  and  in 
our  printed  fxpreiiwons,  no  less  than  our  q>oken  Ian- 
Suag^  dqilomai^  must  be  practiced* 

ABCDEFGHIJICLMNO  ABCDEFGHUKLMNO 
abcdefghijUmnopqrstov  abcdefghijklmncHKirstar 
1234567890  1234567890 

8  point  Title  No.  2  with  Title  Italic 
Words  to  the  sqaare  inch  set  solid  32,  leaded  23 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  ex- 
pressed is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told.  Types 
were  made  to  serve  as  a  mediom  for  conveying  thoughts 
aad  ideas  freoi  one  mind  to  aasther*  and  in  our  printed 
expressions,  no  less  tlMM  aur  spokea  langnage,  diplooMicy 
must  be  practiced. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voice  may  aid 

ABCDEFQHIJKLMNOPQR  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR 
akcdeffghijklanMpqrstavwx  aMHghiitammmnimvwx 
iai48^t90  t$i4MrS9§ 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CmCACO  HAMMONP  NEW  YORK 

6  point  Csslon  No.  3  with  Italic 
Wsrds  t»  ths  sqpwt  iMh  sst  tsUd  48,  Icuded  35 


Om  siuglt  tkmgkt  or  Umt  pUinly  and  forcibly  expressed  is  more  potent 
dian  many  but  vafuely  told.  Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  lor 
eonveyinf  thou|bts  and  idea*  from  one  mind  to  another,  and  in  onr  printad 
•zpraasioM.  no  laaa  tlwe  ner  apokae  ln|wii>  Sfiammer  «Mt  be  praetiead. 

n*  loM  aad  inlaedae  «i  A»  hUHM  ▼oice  may  aid  or  hinder  the  at- 
tainment of  success  in  the  things  attempted.  Gorrespondint  exactly  with 
these  tones  and  inaecUons  of  the  ▼otoe  is  the  wide  yariety  of  styles  and 
sizes  in  type  used  for  printini.  As  the  torn  ef  the  vaiaa  ia  ef  priM 
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV  ABCDBPGmJEtMNOFQkSTaV 

mmim 


8  point  Caslon  No.  3 
Words  to  the  sqnsre  inch  set  solid  32,  landed  2S 

One  single  t/tougltt  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly  expressed  is 
more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely  told.  Types^  were  made  to 
serve  at  a  medium  for  eonveying  thouihtt  Uftd  ideas  irom  ons 
nuul  to  another,  and  in  our  printed  expressions,  no  less  man  our 
q>oken  language,  diplomacy  must  be  practiced. 

The  tone  and  inflection  of  the  human  voice  may  aid  or  hinder 
the  attainment  of  success  in  the  things  attempted.  Correspond- 
ing ezaedy  with  theio  tones  and  tnlleetions  of  Ae  voice  is  the 
ABGDEPGHIJKLMNOPQR  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR 
abcdefghijidnuMpqrtlnvwxyz  ^•^'^^i^'^KtlP^^^^^^^^.*^ 
12345678M  1234567890 

10  point  Caslon  No.  S  widi  Itidie 
Wofda  t»  lie  s«Mra  hwh  sst  solid  21,  iMdod  16 


One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly  and  forcibly 
expressed  is  more  potent  than  many  but  vaguely 
told.  Types  were  made  to  serve  as  a  medium  Usac 
conveying  thoughts  and  ideas  froni  one  mind  to  an- 
other, and  in  our  printed  expressions,  no  less  than 

ABCDEFGHIJKLMN  ABCDEFGHIJKLMN 
abcdefghijklnmopqrstu  abcdefghijklmnopqrstu 
1234567890  1234567890 

FSfe  133 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


MEW  YORK 


12  point  Caslon  No.  3  with  Italic 
Words  to  tlw  tquro  iaeh  Mt  aolid  14,  loadod  11 


One  smgle  thought  or  idem  plainly  and 
lixrciUjr  eaqnressed  is  more  potent  than  many 
but  iragnely  told.  Types  were  made  to  serve 

ABCDEFGHIJKL  ABCDEFGHUKL 
abcdefghijklniiiopcirs  abcdefghiiklmnopqrs 
1234S67890  12345w8P0 

14  point  Caslon  No.  3  with  Italic 
Wmnb  to  the  squaro  iMb  mC  Mlid  10,  loadtd  8 

One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly 
and  forcibly  expressed  is  more  potent 
than  many  but  vaguely  toliL  Types 

ABGDEFGHIJK  ABCDEFGHIJK 
abcdefghijkhiiiiiip  abcdefghijklmnop 
1234567890  1234567890 


14  point  Aatiqiw  widi  IlaKe 

iaih  Mt  aoHd  li.  Im^M  • 

^^^^^^     ^^^w     ^m^MnRi     ifll^^i      iMHTCHnS  VF 


One  single  thought  or  idea  plainly 
and  forcibly  expressed  is  more  potent 
than  many  but  vaguely  told.  Types 
were  made  to  serve  as  a  mediimi  for 

ABCDEFGHIJK  ABCDEFGHIJK 
abcdefghijklmnop  abcdeighijklmnop 
1234567890  1234S67890 

m 


PRINTING 


W.       CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO  BAMMONll   VEW  YOBK 


PRINTING 

PRINTING  is  done  on  different  styles  of  presses,  of 
which  there  arc  many  kinds,  consisting  of  the  flat 
bed,  the  perfecting,  the  two-color,  three-revolution,  the 
rotary,  the  all-sized  rotary,  and  many  others,  all  having 
Oieir  use  in  the  different  classes  of  work  required. 

The  most  common  and  best  press  for  book  prindng 
is  the  flat  bed  press,  made  by  high  grade  printing  press 
concerns. 

The  type  or  plates  arc  made  into  a  form  and  sur- 
rounded by  a  chase,  which  is  securely  fastened  by  lock- 
ing to  the  bed  of  the  press.  The  rollers  covered  with 
ink  are  then  rolled  over  the  form.  The  sheet  to  be 
printed  is  fed  into  the  press  at  the  top  of  the  cylinder, 
and  the  cylinder  with  sheet  attached  is  rolled  over  the 
form,  which  makes  the  impression  in  printing. 

The  pressman  then  makes  the  form  ready  by  either 
underlay  or  overlay,  so  that  the  underlays  under  the  type 
and  the  overlays  on  the  cylinder  mala  the  surf  ace  of 
the  type  absolutely  even,  and  make  a  perfect  impressioii 
on  the  sheet  of  paper. 

The  lock-up  men  and  pressmen  have  wide  experience, 
and  are  specialists  in  high  grade  book  and  catalog  printing. 

AH  methods  of  mechanical,  as  well  as  hand-cut  over- 
lays are  used  for  different  classes  of  work,  enabling  the 
production  of  most  perfect  results  in  afl  grades  of  print- 
ing, in  colors  as  well  as  black. 

Psce  139 


W.  B,  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKMO  MAMMOI©   NEW  1WKK 


PRINTING 

PRINTING  is  done  on  different  styles  of  presses,  of 
which  there  are  many  kinds,  consisting  of  the  flat 
bed,  the  perfecting,  the  two-color,  three-rcvoltttion,  the 
rotary,  the  all-sized  rotary,  and  many  others,  all  having 
their  use  in  the  different  classes  of  work  required. 

The  most  common  and  best  press  for  book  printing 
is  the  fkt  bed  press,  made  by  high  grade  printing  press 
concerns. 

The  type  or  plates  are  made  into  a  form  and  sur- 
rounded by  a  chase,  which  is  securely  fastened  by  lodg- 
ing to  the  bed  of  the  press.  The  rollers  covered  with 
ink  are  then  rolled  over  the  form.  The  sheet  to  be 
printed  is  fed  into  the  press  at  the  top  of  the  cylinder, 
and  the  cylinder  with  sheet  attached  is  rolled  over  the 
form,  which  makes  the  impression  in  printing. 

The  pressman  then  makes  the  form  ready  by  either 
underlay  or  overlay,  so  that  the  underlays  under  the  type 
and  the  overlays  on  the  cylinder  make  the  surface  of 
the  type  absolutely  even,  and  make  a  perfect  impression 
on  the  sheet  of  paper. 

The  lock-up  men  and  pressmen  have  wide  experience, 
and  are  specialists  in  high  grade  book  and  catalog  printing. 

All  methods  of  mechanical,  as  well  as  hand-cut  over- 
lays are  used  for  different  classes  of  work,  enabling  the 
production  of  most  perfect  results  in  all  grades  of  print- 
ing, in  colors  as  well  as  bbck. 

Page  139 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CMCACO  HAMMOND  MEW  WK 


The  Pressroom  contains  a  large  number  of  the  klest 
Hyle  presses,  printh^  fleets  ranging  in  size  from  38x50 
1^  to  49x74  indies,  and  each  of  these  machines  is  in 
perfect  order,  being  rigid  and  strong,  with  perfect  raster 
and  splendid  ink  distribution. 

The  quality  of  ink  is  an  important  factor.  We  use 
only  the  best  grades  obtainable,  and  in  many  cases  re- 
grind  inks  for  special  purposes  in  our  own  ink  factory. 
The  pqier  for  each  piece  of  work  is  subjected  to  a  care- 
ful andysis  before  printing,  and  the  ink  selected  which  is 
especially  fitted  for  the  paper,  in  order  that  the  best 
possible  results  will  be  produced. 

ECONOMY  IN  COLOR  PRINTING 


Editxtfs,  Compilers  and  Publishers  frequently  desire 
ilustrations  printed  in  one  or  more  additional  colors, 
which  can  be  so  placed  as  to  make  it  necessary  to  run 
the  sheet  through  the  press  only  once  for  each  color. 

To  aid  in  arranging  such  a  cokir  scheme  the  f  dbw- 
%tahle  is  giwn,  indicating  with  a  drde  all  po^  which 
print  on  one  side  of  the  sheet  Of  course,  the  figures 
without  ^tlt  drdes  also  indicate  the  pages  which,  when 
printed,  will  appear  on  the  reverse  side  of  the  sheet. 

This  arrangement  applies  particularly  to  work  which 
is  to  be  run  in  16  page  forms  or  larger. 


Bife  140 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

cmCACO  HAMMOND  NEW  tOMC 


A  book  or  catalog  with  any  number  of  pages  above 
16  can  be  arranged  in  this  manner. 


® 

© 

® 

(g) 

@ 

# 

% 

2 

10 

18 

26 

34 

42 

50 

58 

3 

11 

19 

27 

36 

43 

51 

59 

0 

@ 

icy 

® 

# 

® 

@ 

@ 

# 

54 

f 

14 

22 

30 

3S 

46 

62 

15 

23 

31 

39 

47 

63 

® 

m 

» 


Page  141 


ni-t|fc|-"n 


cn 
U 

OS 
H 

O 
H 

O 

:s 

< 

cn 

09 


Q 
< 
O 
OS 
0Q 

o 

o 
x 

I 

>^ 

OS 

Q 
Z 


o 


PAMPHLET,  CATALOG  AND 
BOOKBINDING 

Pamphlet  Binding 
Bookbinding 
Bookbinding  Materials 


'I  k 


f 


;l! 


Ui 


on 


I 


PAMPHLET,  CATALOG  AND 
BOOKBINDING 

Pamphlet  Binding 
Bookbinding 
Bookbinding  Materials 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICACO  HAHMOMD  NEW  IPDRK 


PAMPHLET,  CATALOG  AND  BOOK- 
BINDING 

Folding  Printed  Sheets 

AS  soon  as  printed  sheets  become  dry  they  are  taken 
»  to  the  folding  machines.  These  machines  handle 
sheets  rangiiig  in  sizes  Irom  3x4  inches  up  to  45x62. 
There  are  three  distiiict  types  of  machine;  first  the 
Multiple,  such  as  Double  16's  and  Double  32's;  second 
the  Quadruples,  32's  and  16's;  and  lliird  the  jobbii^ 
class,  which  folds  a  straight  hand  fold  in  8's,  12*8,  16's, 
24's  and  32*s.  The  most  common  methods  of  folding 
forms  are  called  right  angle,  parallel  and  oblong. 

A  right  ani^e  fold  is  called  a  straight  16  page  form, 
three  folds,  each  being  at  right^|^^  the  preceding 
one.  The  first  fold  is  from  riglit  to  left,  the  second 
toward  the  body,  and  the  third  from  left  to  right.  Ma- 
chines will  also  fold  one  32  or  two  16's  inserted.  An 
insert  is  one  16  page  form  inserted  inside  of  another  16 
page  form,  called  the  outsert.  The  same  can  be  done 
with  two  32's,  making  a  64  page  form.  A  32  page  form 
is  folded  in  the  same  manner  as  a  16  page,  but  has  four 
folds. 

The  parallel  fold  is  used  where  forms  are  printed 
"two  on,"  or  called  "two  up,"  i.  e.,  two  pages  just  alike- 
one  on  top  of  the  other.  This  binds  two  sheets  at  once 
which  when  cut  in  half  make  two  separate  books  or 

Page  147 


sheets.  It  always  folds  parallel ;  die  sheet  never  turns, 
folding  over  and  over.  A  16  page  form  has  three  folds. 
A  32  page  lofm  is  also  handled  as  a  parallel  with  fonr 
folds. 

An  ohkmg  fold  is  one  wider  than  it  is  high.  It  is 
made  by  folding  the  sheet  two  folds  parallel  and  then 
putting  in  the  third  fold  at  right  angles  with  the  other 
two.  This  is  usually  hand  work. 

A  qnadnq>le  f  oldii^r  nadnoe  is  one  eqiedaUy  built 
for  four  16  page  f onns  of  long  runs.  It  is  equipped  with 
an  automatic  feeder.  It  folds  four  separate  16  page 
fofins  from  a  full  64  page  sheet.  It  slits  in  three  places, 
delivering  four  16's.  It  inserts  on  the  machine  two  16's, 
making  a  32  page,  and  two  32's,  making  a  64  page 
pamphlet. 

The  point  folders  used  for  small  runs  and  accurate 
folding  are  fed  hy  hand  On  tiie  forms  are  punched  holes 
liscd  as  a  guide  in  folding.  Some  fold  16  pages  right 
ani^e,  others  two  16's  inserted,  which  equal  a  32  page 
form. 

There  are  other  machines  which  fold  4,  8,  10,  12,  14 
and  16  page  forms,  also  2  and  3  up,  but  when  arranging 
odd  size  copy  it  is  always  wdl  to  consult  the  printer  so 
that  it  win  fit  his  madune,  dras  avoidii^  hand  work, 
which  is  slower  and  much  more  expensive. 

Gathekihg  Am  COLLATmC 

After  the  printed  sheets  are  folded  they  aJre  laid  out 
for  tipping  in  ^>ecial  inserts,  illustratkms  and  end  sheets 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO                     HAimOND                      NEW  YOUC 

whidi  is  done  both  by  hand  and  machine,  then  these 
forms  or  signatures  are  gathered  in  ccmsecutive  order 
and  taken  to  the  Sewing  Department  if  a  sewed  book, 
and  to  the  Wiring  Stitching  Department  if  a  stitched  book 
or  catalog.  In  large  editions  the  signatures  are  placed 
in  an  automatic  gathering  machine,  which  does  this  work 
much  more  quickly  than  is  possible  by  hand.  After 
gathering  each  book  is  collated  to  see  that  no  forms  are 
missing  and  that  they  are  in  sequence. 

Pamphlet  Binding 

Pamphlets  and  small  catalogs  are  inserted  in  paper 
covers,  if  a  cover  is  used,  and  wire  stitched  with  two  or 
three  stitches  through  the  back  of  the  book,  called  saddle 
wire  stitching,  or  sidewise  through  the  back  margins  and 
called  side  wire  stitching. 

Pamphlets,  books  or  flyers  ranging  from  4  to  64  pages 
printed  on  medium  weight  paper,  and  as  many  as  96 
pages  if  printed  on  very  light  weight  paper  can  be  saddle 
wire  stitched.  Thicker  catalogs  are  usually  side  wire 
stitched.  In  this  style  of  binding  a  wider  back  margin  is 
left  to  allow  space  for  stitches  so  that  the  book  will  be 
readable  when  bound.  All  flat  stitched  or  sewed  books 
are  gathered  or  collated  in  16  or  32  page  sections. 

Glued-on  Covers 

All  side  wire  stitched  catalogs  and  some  sewed  boc^- 
lets  are  glued  into  the  cover.  Care  should  be  taken  to 

149 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKAOO                     HAMMOND                      NEW  YQBK 

m 

•ekd  oofver  papers  tet  wffl  adhere  firmly  to  the  bade 
of  the  hook;  also  that  the  gram  of  the  cover  paper  nms 
the  right  way,  so  that  it  will  not  wrinkle  when  glued  or 
break  when  folded. 

Automatic  covering  machines  are  used  to  cover  paper 
covered  books  or  panq^hlets,  varying  from  ^  inch  to 
mdbcs  in  thidmess  and  almosl  any  length,  and  do 
it  mndi  neater  tiian  can  be  done  by  hand— there  is  no 
smearing  of  the  ink  used  in  printing  the  backbone  of  the 
cover  and  the  glue  adheres  to  the  backbone  evenly  and 
does  not  soil  the  inside  oi  the  first  and  last  pages. 

MmmmacaiG  Fntsr  and  Last  Foems 

In  cases  where  books  have  bard  usage,  it  is  often 
wdl  to  reinforce  the  first  and  last  sections  of  the  bo<^ 
with  a  muslin  strip.  This  means  that  strips  of  doth 
are  pasted  around  the  edges  of  the  first  and  last  forms 
and  then  sewed  into  the  book  in  the  usual  way.  The 
strips  of  doth  extend  under  the  end  papers  which  are 
pasted  inside  the  covcra  and  reinforce  the  hinge  joints 
and  also  give  added  strength  in  holding  the  book  to  the 
cover. 

£iiD  Sheets 

End  sheets  are  the  first  and  last  sheets  that  are  lined 
up  to  the  and  are  usually  heavier  than  the  paper 
used  for  the  body  of  the  bode  As  a  rule  tii^r  are  made 

ni0e  ISS 


B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAIGO  HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


double  tl^  r^:ular  ps^e  size  of  the  book,  i.  e.,  four  pages 
instead  of  two.  They  are  folded  once  and  tipped  on  the 
outside  of  the  first  and  last  forms  before  sewing.  When 
the  book  is  put  into  the  cover  the  outside  sheet  is  lined 
up  to  the  cover,  thus  becoming  one  of  the  strongest 
factors  for  holding  the  book  in  place. 

In  cheaper  grades  of  books  the  end  sheets  are  gen- 
erally of  plain  white  paper,  of  a  heavier,  stronger  and 
more  durable  quality  than  used  in  the  body  of  the  book. 
In  better  bindings  lithographed,  marbled  and  cover  papers 
of  various  colors  and  grades  are  used. 

The  color  of  the  end  sheets  should  always  be  har- 
monious with  the  color  of  the  binding  material. 

Cloth  Joined  End  Sheets 

Qoth  joined  means  just  what  its  name  implies — a 
cloth  joint,  which  is  made  by  dividing  the  end  sheet  into 
two  parts  and  joining  them  together  with  a  strip  of  suit- 
able doth. 

In  large,  heavy  books  cloth  joints  serve  as  a  reinforc- 
ing for  the  hinge  joint  of  the  cover,  helping  to  hold  the 
book  in  place,  enable  it  to  be  opened  easily  and  to  have 
a  better  appearance. 

Book  Sewing 

Books  consisting  of  64  pages  or  more  are  usually 
sewed  on  a  book  sewing  machine  which  permits  its  pages 
to  be  opened  dear  to  the  backbone. 

Page  ISI 


! 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

cmCAfiO                     RMOMMD                      NEW  WML 

The  Smythe  book  sewing  machine  makes  a  block 
stitch  along  the  backbone  of  the  sections  and  is  used  for 
all  medium  and  large  size  books,  ranging  up  to  12x18 
inches. 

The  Singer  sewiii^  inadune  stitch  is  very  similar  to 
that  of  the  dmnestic  sewing  machine  and  is  used  in  sew- 
ing together  sections  of  flat  opening  books  and  in  school 
text-books  up  to  }i  inch  in  thickness  for  use  by  small 
children  where  extra  strength  is  required. 

Tafbs 

Heavy  books  are  frequently  sewed  on  cloth  tapes, 
i  e.,  two,  or  in  specially  heavy  books  three  tapes  are 
inserted  through  the  stitches  in  sewing  and  the  ends  ex- 
tended an  indi  or  two  so  that  when  the  book  is  cased 
into  the  cover  the  tapes  are  securely  ftfl&neit  ietween 
the  end  sheets  and  the  board  in  the  cover. 

Smashing  and  Trimming 

After  the  book  is  sewed  and  before  cutting,  it  is  fed 
into  smashing  machines  or  book  compressors  that  tightly 
compress  the  folded  sheets  together  in  order  to  take  all 
the  swell  out  of  the  back  of  the  book,  so  that  when  the 
hook  is  i^aced  in  the  cutting  madunes  it  will  he  of  even 
tfiickness  and  can  be  cut  accurately  to  fit  the  covers  which 
win  be  pasted  on  the  book  later  on. 

It  is  necessary  that  the  cutting  of  the  book  be  done 
accurately  and  uniformly,  as  it  is  most  important  that 

Jhmt  152 


W.  B. 

CONKEY 

COMPANY 

1  cmayco 

HAMMOND 

the  cover  and  the  trimmed  book  fit  properly,  and  in  order 
to  have  tmiform  squares  on  the  finished  book. 

Rounding  and  Backing 

After  the  book  is  trimmed  and  the  hades  have  been 
glued  up  with  flexible  glue  in  order  to  keep  the  book 
from  cracking,  the  backs  are  allowed  to  partially  dry, 
and  before  the  glue  has  become  thoroughly  set,  the  book 
is  fed  into  a  rounding  and  backing  machine  which  rounds 
the  back  of  the  book  by  passing  through  a  pair  of  steel 
rollers,  after  which  the  back  is  firmly  set  into  the  jaws 
of  the  machine  and  the  very  heavy  steel  roller  allowed 
to  roll  over  the  back,  which  forms  the  joint  of  the  book. 

Great  care  must  be  taken  in  this  operation  in  order 
that  the  joint  of  the  book  may  be  uniform,  and  that  the 
jaws  do  not  cut  the  end  sheets. 

Books  which  are  to  be  finished  with  a  flat  back  do  not 
pass  through  this  process,  but  go  directly  from  the  trim- 
ming machines  to  the  finishing  department. 

Headbanding  and  Lining 

After  the  book  has  been  rounded  and  backed,  it  goes 
to  the  headbander  and  liner,  who  again  glues  the  back 
with  flexible  glue,  and  then  places  on  the  back  a  heavy 
super,  or  cheesecloth,  which  holds  the  book  into  the  cover 
and  which  extends  over  the  joints  of  the  book  usually 
one-half  inch  on  each  side,  and  covers  the  backbone  within 
one-quarter  of  an  inch  of  the  head  and  tail,  after  which 
either  one  or  two  back  linings  are  pasted  on  the  backbone 


W.        CONKEY  COMPANY 

NEv  mm 


of  the  book,  for  which  a  heavy  fibrous  paper  is  used, 
and  which  is  thoroughly  rubbed  in  in  order  to  make  it 
strong,  yet  at  the  same  time  perfectly  flexible. 

In  case  headbands  are  used,  they  are  put  on  the  book 
before  the  linings.  After  tiie  book  has  been  headbanded 
and  lined,  it  is  allowed  to  dry  (the  flexible  glue  preventing 
it  from  becoming  absolutely  dry),  after  which  the  book 
is  ready  to  be  cased  in. 


Gam,  Makbled  and  Stained  Edges 

Many  of  the  better  grade  books  are  given  a  fancy 

Gold  may  be  used  for  all  three  edges  of  a  book  or 
only  on  the  top.  If  the  book  is  library  size  it  is  considered 
good  taste  to  put  gold  on  the  top  and  leave  the  other  two 
edges  plain. 

Marbling  and  staining  are  put  on  all  three  edges.  The 
color  of  the  stain  or  marbling  ^ould  harmonize  with 
the  cdor  of  the  binding  material. 

Stamping  and  Embossing 

Books  may  be  stamped  in  different  cok>red  inks,  or 
embossed  in  gdd  leaf,  metal,  aluminum,  or  different 
colored  compositions.  Ink  stamping  is  done  on  a  heavy 
press  built  for  this  purpose.  Embossing  is  done  on  hot 
embossing  presses,  and  because  of  the  enormous  pressure 
necessary  to  properly  stamp  or  emboss  a  book,  stamping 
dies  made  of  brass  are  generally  used. 

Ave  1S4 


How  a  book  should  be  stamped  depends  entirely  upon 
the  nature  of  the  book,  and  the  class  and  color  of  mate- 
rial used.  Gold  stamping  is  seldom  used  on  a  cheaply 
made  book,  and  ink  is  rarely  used  on  strictly  high  class 
books.  In  this,  as  in  most  every  other  feature  of  book- 
l»nding  and  making,  much  is  left  to  the  preference  of 
the  author  or  publisher. 

Thumb  Indexing 

The  very  nature  of  some  books  demand  a  thumb  in- 
dex for  the  purpose  of  enabling  the  reader  to  find  quickly 
just  the  place  or  part  of  the  book  containing  the  informa- 
tion cksired.  Bibles  and  dictionaries  are  usually  indexed 
in  this  manner. 

Casing-in 

The  casing-in  machine  feeds  the  covers  from  a  hopper 
to  the  f  orwarded  book,  which  is  placed  over  an  arm,  and 
paste  rollers  are  drawn  down  over  the  outsides  of  the 
book,  pasting  the  end  leaves,  which  then  meet  the  cover, 
thus  completing  the  putting  of  the  case  onto  the  bound 
book.  The  operator  adjusts  the  book  to  a  perfect  fit 
in  the  case. 

Books  can  be  cased-in  by  hand,  although  the  machine 
is  much  more  rapid  in  its  operation.  However,  fine  edi- 
tion books  are  usually  cased-in  by  hand. 

After  the  book  is  cased-in  it  should  be  placed  in  a 
nipping  press  in  order  to  keep  the  book  in  compact  form 
ready  for  the  next  process. 

Pa«e  iss 


m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CiaCiOO                     HMBNIID                      MEIT  VOK 

K  Pkessimg 


The  boolcs  are  now  frfaced  between  brass  bound 
boards,  the  brass  on  the  edges  of  the  board  extending 
from  an  eighth  of  an  inch  to  a  quarter  of  an  inch,  as  the 
depth  of  the  joint  requires,  and  this  brass  is  fitted  into 
the  joint  of  the  book,  which  was  made  by  the  rounding 
and  backing  machine,  making  a  groove  in  the  back  of  the 
cover,  thus  fomui^  the  jmnt  of  the  book. 

The  brass  bound  boards  are  piled  with  four  to  six 
books  between  each  one  of  them  into  a  press,  one  on  top 
of  the  other,  until  the  press  is  filled,  after  which  the  pile 
is  subjected  to  a  proper  pressure  and  allowed  to  remain 
under  pressure  until  the  books  are  fully  dried. 

It  is  most  important  that  books  should  remain  in  the 
press  from  twenty-four  to  forty-eight  hours  to  altow 
tibem  to  become  thoroughly  dried  and  seasoned  in  order 
to  prevent  warping  or  curling  of  the  covers,  which  often 
occurs  in  books  that  have  been  taken  out  of  press  too 
quickly. 

Ths  Inspection  of  Books 

By  inspection  of  books  is  meant  a  final  examination 
of  every  single  book,  done  for  the  purpose  of  discovering 
any  defects  in  the  mechanical  part  of  the  work,  and  for 
removing  partkles  of  paste  or  glue  which  may  possibly 
have  accumulated  in  the  process  of  manufacture,  thus 
assuring  absolute  deanliness  and  preventing  the  finished 
bode  from  having  a  slovenly  appearance. 


STYLES  OF  BOOKBINDING 


Books  are  bound  in  stiff  board,  flexible  and  limp 
covers  in  an  infinite  variety  of  colors  and  shades.  Paper, 
doth,  imitation  leather  and  leader  are  the  principal  mate- 
rials used.  They  are  bound  in  a  number  of  styles.  In  a 
full  binding  both  the  back  and  sides  are  covered  with  the 
same  material,  whether  cloth,  leather  or  other  binding 
material.  In  quarter  binding  one  kind  of  material,  such 
as  leather  or  doth,  covers  the  back,  and  the  sides  are  of 
a  dififerent  material  Half  binding  is  very  siinilar  to 
quarter,  except  that  the  comers  of  the  board  are  covered 
with  the  same  material  as  is  used  on  the  back,  and  three- 
quarter  binding  means  that  the  leather  or  cloth  on  the 
back  extends  somewhat  beyond  the  hii^e  joint,  perhaps 
an  inch  or  more,  depending  upoh  the  size  o£  the  book, 
and  the  doth  or  leather  comers  extend  over  a  lax|^er 
surface  than  in  half  bindings. 

Limp  and  Flexible  Covers  are  most  always  made  in 
full  cloth  or  leather,  or  other  binding  material,  and  a 
flexible  felt  board  is  used  as  a  filler  to  prevent  the  sides 
from  breaking.  On  flexible  covers  the  board  or  filler  is* 
glued  to  the  material  used,  and  for  limp  bindings  the 
cloth  or  leather  is  loose,  the  filler  being  attached  to  the 
covering  material  only  at  the  edges  of  ^e  cover. 


Fitge  1S7 


Pi 

mi 

W.  M.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

GHKACO  HAMIiONO 

BOOKBINDING  MATERIALS 


Book  Cloth 

The  fabric  of  book  doth  k  usittlly  made  from  cotton 
doth  covered  with  starch  and  a  heavy  filler,  which  is 
pressed  into  the  mesh  of  Ae  doth  to  give  it  body,  and 
to  make  it  impervious  to  water  and  absolutely  smooth. 

It  is  then  dyed  to  the  desired  shade,  after  which  it 
is  run  through  steel  cut  die  rolls,  which  form  the  pattern 
of  the  book  doth  as  it  Bppem  on  the  outside  of  the  book. 

Heavier  and  stronger  doth  is  made  from  linen,  which 
is  subjected  to  a  similar  process  to  get  the  impervk>us 
quality,  cokw  and  pattern. 

Book  cloth  comes  in  rolls  thirty-eight  inches  wide,  and 
about  thirty-eight  yards  to  the  roll. 

There  are  also  many  fancy  designs,  shades  and  pat- 
terns of  book  doth  that  are  used  for  different  purposes, 
hot  tiiese  are  not  as  a  rule  used  for  binding  editkm  books. 

Imitation  Leather 

Mudi  imitation  leather  is  bemg  used  in  bookbinding 

and  the  prospects  bid  fair  for  its  continuance,  for  the 
reason  that  it  can  be  grained  and  colored  to  match  any 
real  leather  desired,  and  is  well  adapted  for  use  in 
mechanical  binding. 

Tie  body  or  base  of  all  imitatkm  leather  is  doth 
fabric  A  compound  cooabting  principally  of  celluloid, 
gun  cotton  and  castor  oil  is  made  into  a  jelly-like  sub- 
Bi«e  i  ss 


W.        CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHiCAlGO  HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


Stance  and  applied  in  a  very  thin,  even  coatmg  to  the 
surface  of  the  fabric  to  give  it  Ae  leather  effect 

The  same  quality  of  fabric  is  used  for  several  grades 
of  imitation  leather,  but  the  number  of  thin  coatings  of 
the  compound  increases  the  quality  as  well  as  the  price 
of  the  materiaL 

Leather  Bindings 

In  order  to  clearly  understand  the  difference  between 
various  kinds  and  grades  of  leather  it  is  necessary  to 
briefly  consider  the  workings  of  Nature  in  preparing  the 
various  skins  and  their  many  shades  of  quality. 

All  leather  used  for  bookbinding  purposes  comes  from 
one  of  the  following  named  animals:  Seals,  cattle,  sheep, 
goats  and  hogs.  Only  the  best  grades  of  leather  can  be 
used  in  bookbinding.  These  are  characterized  by  thdr 
soft  and  pliable  though  strong  texture.  The  harder  and 
stiffer  qualities  of  leather  are  used  for  other  purposes. 

Sealskins  and  the  leather  made  therefrom  varies  but 
little  because  those  animals  inhabit  only  cold  dimates. 
Cattle  and  sheep,  on  the  contrary,  are  raised  in  nearly 
every  country,  no  matter  what  the  dimate,  and  this 
causes  a  variation  in  the  thidcness  and  toughness  of  the 
skin  as  well  as  varying  degrees  of  coarse  and  fine  hair 
or  wool,  all  of  which  makes  the  leather  tanned  from 
such  skins  variable  in  strength  and  pliability. 

Cattle  raised  in  the  central  and  northern  states  pro- 
duce a  liner  grained  and  more  pliable  leather  than  in  the 
southern  states.   Consequently  the  leather  made  from 

159 


II  |J|i|*iit|||l|l| 

<\.li;4i.iliilllllll 


the  skk  of  a  Texas  steer  is  made  into  sole  leather  be- 
cause Nature  suited  that  skin  to  the  hot,  dry  climate- 
making  it  coarse,  thick  and  tough. 

The  same  principle  applies  to  goats  from  which  our 
genuine  morocco  comes.   Leather  made  from  American- 


f.  Fiance,  Germany  and  Switzeriand  ranks  among  the 
best  to  be  had  for  booldmiding  purposes. 

Sheep  raising  in  America  is  done  with  a  view  to  pro- 
^idng  meat  rather  than  skins  for  leather.  As  a  conse- 
quence leather  made  from  our  sheep  is  seldom  used  in 
bookbinding.   It  is  coarse,  open  and  lacking  In  strength. 

Sheep  raised  in  Australia  and  New  Zealand  are  sur- 
rounded by  climatic  conditkms  favorable  to  the  produc- 
tion of  the  finest,  botfi  in  wool  and  sldns,  which  naturally 
results  in  the  finest  grade  of  leather.  It  is  said  that  sheep 
and  goats  are  crossed  in  breeding  in  those  countries  for 
the  specific  purpose  of  producing  skins  which  when 
tanned  have  the  appearance  of  sheepskins,  and  the 
toughness  of  the  goatskins.  From  these  animals  the 
very  best  and  most  expensive  sheep^dns  are  produced. 

Qmsidering  the  various  leathers  separately  we  find  the 
one  more  generally  used  in  bookbinding  is  sheepskin. 

Sheepskin 

Leather  made  from  sheepskin  can  be  finished  in  a 
great  variety  of  ways,  producing  qualities  suited  to  many 
different  purposes.    The  full  thickness  of  the  skin  is 


160 


m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHIC4GO                      HAMMOND                       NEW  YORK 

used  in  making  imitation  morocco  sheep,  ooze  sheep,  f  uE 
law  sheep,  roans  and  bock  leather. 

"Imitation  Morocco  Sheep"  means  that  the  skin  has 
been  colored  and  embossed  to  imitate  morocco. 

Oose  Sheep  means  that  the  skin  has  been  finished 
with  the  flesh  side  out,  giving  it  the  appearance  of  velvet. 
It  comes  in  colors  and  is  used  for  college  annuals  and 
other  special  bindings. 

Full  Law  Sheep  is  tanned  in  a  russet  or  natural  color 
and  is  used  aknost  exclusively  for  binding  law  and 
medical  books. 

Roans  have  a  very  fine,  smooth  finish,  may  be  had 
in  any  color  desired,  and  a  few  years  ago  were  used 
extensively  in  general  bookbinding. 

Bock  leather  is  made  in  Germany  from  the  full  sheep- 
skin and  is  finished  and  grained  to  imitate  morocco. 

Nearly  all  of  the  above  mentioned  grades  of  sheepskin 
are  made  from  skins  grown  in  Australia  or  New  Zealand. 

Split  Sheep 

When  a  sheepskin  is  split,  i.  e.,  completely  separating 
the  outer  or  hair  surface  of  the  skin  from  the  lower 
part  next  to  the  flesh,  the  upper  or  hair  surface  is  fin- 
ished into  a  variety  of  grades  and  colors  called  **Skivers." 
The  portion  nearest  the  flesh  is  called  "Splits,"  "Fleshers," 
or  "Buffed  Flesher,"  which  cannot  well  be  colored  and 
therefore  is  seldom  used  in  bookbinding. 

Skiver  comes  in  numerous  grades  and  colors  and  is 
perhaps  used  more  extensively  than  any  other  kind  of 
leader  for  bookbinding.  m 


W.  B. 

CONKEY 

COMPANY 

CHICAGO 

HAMMOND 

''Lmmff  Skkm^  is  ^  a  little  thnmer  than  tlic  regu- 
lar grade  of  skivers  and  is  used  for  lining  the  inside 
covers  of  Bibles  and  other  nicely  bound  books. 

Title  Skivers  are  split  thin  and  finished  with  a  glazed 
surface  and  used  for  title  stamping  on  law  books. 

Gramed  Skivers  are  the  same  as  others  excqit  that 
they  are  cdored  and  embossed  in  any  design  wanted. 

Law  Skkmrs  are  similar  to  odiers  except  that  they 
are  laimed  in  a  msset  or  natural  color  and  used  in  bind- 
ii^  law  and  medical  books. 

Bafwing  Skivers  are  the  thinnest  produced  and  are 
used  for  linings  and  titles  on  law  books,  etc 


CbwlilDB 

Several  distinct  kinds  or  grades  of  leather  are  pro- 
duced from  the  skins  of  cattle  after  tanning  by  a  process 
of  splitting. 

One  method  is  to  first  ''slab''  or  remove  a  very  thin, 
imcven  sheet  from  tiie  flesh  side  and  then  split  the  skin 
in  two.  The  lower  or  bottom  part  of  the  skin  is  called 
a  "split"  and  is  used  for  insoles  in  shoes,  while  the  out- 
side or  hair  portion  is  grained  and  cok>red  and  used  for 
bookbinding  purposes. 


BUIVIMG 

By  a  slightly  diflFerent  method  of  splitting  still  another 
quaHty  of  leather  is  produced,  known  as  buffing."  This 
it  a  very  thin  sheet  of  leather  taken  from  the  hair  amy 


w. 

B.  CONKEY 

COMPANY 

cHiaico 

HAMMOND 

NEW  YORK 

face  of  the  skin,  then  colored  and  grained.  It  if  Hied 
extensively  in  binding  medium  and  light  weig^it  books. 
The  under  portion  of  hides  split  in  this  way  is  used  for 
upholstering  purposes. 


The  best  grade  of  leather  obtainable  for  bookbinding 
comes  from  the  upper  or  hair  side  of  the  skin  of  seals. 
The  lower  portion  of  the  skin— called  "Flesher  Seal" 
is  made  into  ladies'  pocket  books,  etc.,  not  bdng  suitable 
for  bookbinding. 


Pigskin 

Pigskin  has  excellent  wearing  qualities  but  because 
of  the  thickness  of  the  skin  and  the  difficulty  of  removing 
it  from  the  animal  without  mutilation  makes  its  use  in 
bookbinding  uncommon,  except  on  fancy,  high  priced 
books. 


Calfskin 

Calfskin  produces  an  excellent  grade  ol  leather  and 
is  used  extensively  for  many  kinds  of  work,  which  makes 
the  price  very  high.  For  this  reason  it  is  seldom  used 
in  bookbinding.   It  comes  in  all  colors. 

Oou  Cdf  is  finished  with  the  flesh  side  out.  It  is 
extensively  used  in  making  ladies'  suede  shoes,  but  seldom 
f  oir  book  work. 

Pait  Itfl 


€X>MPARISON  IN  QUALITY  AND  PRICE 

The  relative  quality  of  the  various  kkds  of  leather 
best  suited  for  bookbinding  purposes,  b^finnuig  with  the 
most  expensive,  is  as  follows:  Seal,  calf,  pigskin,  mo- 
fwco,  cowhide,  roans,  sheep,  buffing  and  skiver. 

BlNDEKS'  BOASD 

Binders'  board,  which  is  used  for  the  covers  of  books 
over  which  the  cloth  is  drawn,  is  usually  made  from  waste 
paper  of  all  grades  which  are  ground  together  into  a  pulp 
and  rolled  into  boards  of  different  thicknesses  ^ilar  to 
the  process  used  in  making  paper. 

After  the  thkkness  of  the  board  has  been  decided. 
It  IS  run  dirough  very  heavy  calendered  rolls  in  order  to 
make  it  t^form  in  thickness,  which  is  most  important, 
and  absolutely  smooth  and  firm,  so  that  the  cover  will 
not  blister,  warp  or  curl  after  it  has  been  made  into  the 
book  cover  through  the  many  processes  which  it  has  to 
pass  in  the  constmctkxn  of  a  bode 

Much  dq>ends  upon  the  cleanliness  of  the  stock  used, 
and  tiie  care  with  whkh  bmders'  board  is  made,  as  there 
are  a  number  of  different  grades,  and  only  the  best  of 
m'ell  seasoned  board  should  be  used  in  order  to  get  per- 
fectly smooth  covers  that  will  not  blister,  warp  or  curl. 

The  standard  size  sheets  of  binders'  board  range 
from  22x28  up  to  33x44  indies,  although  in  large  quan- 
tities ^>edal  sizes  can  be  ordered. 

The  thickness  of  the  board  is  designated  by  numbers 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO  HAMMOND  NEW  VOIIK 


and  measured  by  points  (a  point  being  one  thousandth 
of  an  inch),  as,  for  instance:  No.  15  medium,  size  22x28, 
is  167  points  thick;  No.  25,  100  points  thick;  No.  40, 
62  points  thick;  and  No.  60,  41  points  thick. 

Board  is  sold  by  the  bundle,  and  each  bundle  wei|^ 
£lty  pounds,  containing  the  number  of  sheets  of  the  size 
ordered.  Thus  a  bundle  of  No.  15  contains  15  sheets. 


BOOK  MARGINS 

That  book-making  is  an  art  is  shown  in  no  particular 
more  clearly  than  in  the  margins  of  books.  Most  other 
features  of  book-making  can  be  controlled  by  fixed  prin- 
ciples, but  works  of  art  are  not  produced  in  accordance 
with  set  rules. 

The  size  and  style  of  type  used  in  setting  the  work, 
the  kind  and  weight  of  paper,  the  color  or  colors  of  ink 
used  in  printing,  and  the  style  of  binding  all  have  a 
bearing  upon  the  subject  of  margins.  Therefore,  in  the 
publishing  of  a  new  work,  vmless  copying  some  other 
work  of  a  similar  kind,  it  is  well  to  leave  this  most  im- 
portant subject  to  the  judgment  of  the  printer.  Large 
printers  and  binders  like  the  W.  B.  Conkey  Company 
have  men  who  are  expert  in  this  line,  and  the  product 
of  our  Company  in  the  past  speaks  voluminously  for 
itself. 


Page  165 


m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO              mMMwiB              tmr  vomc 

GLOSSARY 

WoKDS  AND  Phrases  Used  in  the  Bookbinding  Trade 
IN  Addition  to  Those  Appearing  in  the 
Foregoing  Chapter 

BAcnomc  Hie  Indt  edge  of  a  book. 
Backing.  See  RoiMidii«  and  Baddng. 

Bands.  The  ridm  <n       kmititoot  of  boolcs;  mmSkf  called 

Raised  Bands. 

Blanking.  Sometimes  called  Blinding.    The  stamping  of  book 

cofers  without  color  or  gold. 
BLBffiiitG.  A  book  is  said  to  bleed  when  it  is  trimiiied  lo  closely 

that  the  printed  text  is  cut  into. 
Bulk.   The  thickness  of  a  book  without  its  cover. 
BTOCTtnia   Tying  up  folded  sheets  by  machine  for  convenient 

handhngi 

Btonished  Edges.   Edges  of  a  book  polished  by  special  tools. 

Gilt  edges  are  burnished  after  the  gold  has  been  laid.  Marbled 

and  stained  edges  are  sometimes  burnished  to  give  them  a 

richer  appeaianoe. 
Caol  The  coftr  of  a  hook  before  the  hook  has  been  phced 

in  it. 

Case  Binding.  Binding  books  in  full  cloth  or  leather  covers 
K^iich  have  been  made  separately,  and  not  built  on  the  book. 

Casing-In.  The  operation  of  pastinff  a  book  into  its  cover. 

Colophon.  A  desipi  of  a  ramers  or  Pnhlisher's  mark  or 
emblem. 

Cut  Flush.  A  book,  the  cover  and  body  paper  of  which  have 

been  trimmed  at  the  nme  time. 
Dies.  Letters,  patterns  or  designs  cut  in  tMras8»  and  used  in 

stamping  or  embossing  book  covers. 
Divinity  Cmcuit.  A  full,  flexible  binding  of  soft  leather  with 

edges  extended  so  as  to  f  okl  over  and  protect  the  edges  of  the 

book;  used  chiefly  on  Bibles  and  Prayer  Books. 
Drop  Folio.  The  pafe  ntmber  when  it  ^pcars  at  the  bottom  of 

the  page. 

Emnoir  BnnnHG.  The  binding  of  large  quantities  of  single  titles 

or  sets  of  books. 
Forwarding.  The  process  of  prepariqg  hooks  for  their  'Covers 
after  sewiQg. 
FUe  166 


W.  B, 

CONKEY 

COMPANY  1 

cHiaioo 

HAMMOND 

NEW  YORK 

Gluihis  Up.  Applying  f^xtt  to  the  hades,  of  sewed  books  before 
tiie  process  of  rounduig  and  backing. 

Guards,  Mounted  On.  Pages  are  said  to  be  mounted  on  guards 
when  they  are  pasted  to  strips  of  strong  paper  or  cloth,  and 
sewed  into  the  book.  The  first  and  last  signatures  of  a  book 
are  sometiffles  guarded  in  this  way  to  protect  them  from 
imfHif^i  stram. 

Hquuiw*  or  Spring  Back.  A  book  with  a  spring  back  is  made 
W^  a  tubular  lining  pasted  to  the  backbone  of  the  book 
ttid  also  to  the  back  of  the  cover.  This  prevents  the  cover 
material  from  craddng  when  the  book  is  opened,  and  adds 
M^Uierably  to      sttingfh  of  IhQ  binding. 

Lining.  The  material— usually  crash  cloth  or  paper  which  is 
pasted  on  the  back  of  the  book  after  it  has  been  sewed  and 
backed,  to  reinforce  the  sewing  and  hold  the  signatures 
cogeuier. 

Loose  Back.  A  book  has  a  loose  bade  ndien  the  bade  of  the  cover 
is  not  glued  to  the  back  of  the  book. 

Marbled  Edges.  The  art  of  treating  the  edges  of  books  with 
dyes  floated  on  a  surface  of  a  mucilaginous  fluid  by  the 
process  of  gently  dipping  the  edges  into  the  fluid.  There  are 
certain  recognized  standard  patterns  vMdti  are  made  with 
instruments  shaped  like  combs. 

Nipping.  The  pressing  of  books  after  casing-in,  for  the  purpose 
of  eliminating  wrinkles  in  the  end  sheets  and  hinges.  This  is 
done  before  placing  the  books  into  regular  book  presses. 

Bounding  and  Backing.  The  shapng  of  a  hodc  by  hand  or 
madiine  to  appear  concave  on  the  front  and  convex  at  the  back, 
and  the  making  of  a  ridge  or  joint  against  which  the  cover 
boards  are  iitt^ 

Sir  Heads.  The  particular  set  at  the  head  and  foot  of  the  back 
of  a  heavy  cloth  bound  book  on  which  the  doth  at  the  ends  has 
been  rubbed  down  by  hsmd  to  fit  snugly  over  the  head  bands.  ^ 

Signature.  A  printed  sheet  folded  and  reader  to  become  a  section 
of  a  book.  When  the  folded  sheet  contams  sixteen  or  thirty- 
two  pages,  it  is  called  a  nxteen  or  a  thhrty-two  page  signa- 
ture respectively. 

SOUARES.  The  edges  of  a  book  cover  which  extend  from  one- 
eighth  to  a  quarter  of  an  inch  all  round  beyond  the  pages 
of  a  book. 

Stainid  Emm,  The  edges  of  a  hook  stamed  with  colored  ink 

Of  <||C 

~  167 


1 

CHICAGO 

B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

HMMOm                       MEW  YORK 

Stmum  Ebgis.  tht  edges  of  a  book  stiiipled  or  sprinkled  witii 

cok»red  ink  or  dye  to  give  a  Sdpskd  meet 
Tight  Back.  When  the  back  of  the  cover  is  glued  directly  to 

the  back  of  the  book,  it  is  said  to  have  a  tight  back. 
TusBT  Joint.  When  the  board  of  the  cover  fits  closely  up  to 

the  ridge  of  the  back  of  the  book,  eliminating  tiie  crease  of 

the  hinge,  it  is  said  to  have  a         joint   Imitation  hand 

made  books  are  done  in  this  way. 

BOOK  SIZES  BY  NAME 

32  mo.  A  tiook,  liie  trimmecl  size  of  vliich  is  approxi- 
mately sy^xSji. 

18  mo.   A  book,  the  trimmed  size  of  whidi  is  apfnrosci- 
matdty  4)«ix6j|. 

16  mo.  A  book,  liie  trimmed  size  of  whkli  is  apfiroid- 
matdy  A}ix7}i. 

12  mo.   A  book,  the  trimmed  size  of  which  is  s^roxi- 

Duodecimo.  A  book,  the  trimmed  size  of  which  is 
approximate^  S^^xa 

Crown  Octavo.   A  book,  the  trimmed  size  of  which  is 
approximately  5j4x9. 

Rc|^  Octam  A  book,  the  trimmed  she  of  which  is 
appraximately  6}^x9^. 

Royal  Octavo.    A  book,  the  trimmed  size  of  which  is 
approximately  7}ixl0^. 

Iiiq^erial  Octam  A  book,  the  trimmed  size  of  which  is 
i^iproiximately  8^x11]^. 

Quarto.   A  book,  the  trimmed  size  of  which  is  approxi- 
mately 9xl2ji. 


PULP  AND  PAPER-MAKING 


Various  Kinds  of  Pulp 
Book  and  Catalog  Papers 
Bonds,  Lixxsers  and  Writings 
Parchment  and  Onionskin  Papers 
£sTiiiATiNG  Paper  Stock 


PULP  AND  PAPER-MAKING 

THE  United  States  uses  more  paper  than  any  nation 
on  earth  and  logically  takes  her  place  at  the  head 
of  the  list  in  the  manufacture  of  this  product,  which 
ranks  as  one  of  the  country's  greatest  industries. 

The  kinds  and  brands  of  paper  are  so  numerous  as 
to  be  surpassed  only  by  the  uses  for  which  paper  is  em- 
ployed. However,  the  processes  by  which  it  is  made  and 
the  materials  used  in  its  manufacture  are  very  much  the 
same  everywhere.  We  present  here  only  such  informa- 
tion as  will  be  of  value  to  the  buyers  of  Paper  and 
Printing. 

Wood  Pulps 

Wood  pulp  forms  the  basis  of  most  every  kind  of 
paper  stock,  and  in  general  all  paper  is  made  from  various 
forms  and  combinations  of  wood  and  rag  pulp.  Aside 
from  these  are  also  other  materials,  as  well  as  mechanical, 
mineral  and  chemical  processes  employed,  each  of  which 
performs  its  part  in  paper-making.  And  the  variation 
either  of  the  quantity  or  strength  of  any  of  these  makes 
a  corresponding  difference  in  the  finished  product 

The  strength  of  chemicals  used,  the  steam  pressure 
and  the  duration  of  cooking  are  the  most  important  in 
the  manufacture  of  chemical  pulp.  As  a  rule,  slow  cook- 
ing of  pu^  at  low  steam  pressure  gives  the  best  results. 

Page  171 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

YORK 


The  pranary  processes  in  making  the  various  chemical 
wood  pulps  are  much  the  same.  The  only  distinction 
lies  in  the  different  chemical  treatments  of  the  fiber,  all 
of  which  have  as  their  object  the  isolation  of  the  cellulose 
fiber,  which  is  used  as  the  basis  of  all  paper  stocks  through 
the  dissoliitioii  of  those 


not  usable. 

The  great  variation  in  the  quality  of  wood  pulps  is 
due  to  the  numerous  kinds  of  wood  used  in  making, 
and  the  different  chemical  treatments.  In  all  pulp  manu- 
facture, screens  are  employed  to  produce  a  uniform 
product 


Ground  Wood  Pulp 


Ground  wood  pulp  is  manufactured  by  removing  all 
peeling  or  bark  from  the  log  and  forcing  it  under  hydraulic 
pressure  against  a  grindstone,  which  rotates  across  the 
grain  and  grinds  togedier  the  fibrous  and  non-fibrous 
materiak  in  the  wood.  Water  is  admitted  to  the  grinder 
and  the  slush  thus  produced  is  thrown  off  and  screened. 
It  is  then  ready  for  conversion  into  paper. 

However,  grotmd  wood  cannot  be  used  alone  in  the 
manufacture  of  paper,  as  the  fibers  are  too  short.  Other 
materials  must  be  added  to  give  it  the  necessary  toughness 
or  strength,  which  may  be  a  portion  of  other  kinds  of 
wood  pn^  or  of  old  paper  stock  which  has  previously 
been  made  and  perhaps  used  in  printing.  All  ink  or  other 
stains  must,  of  course,  have  first  been  removed  by  wash- 

n«e  172 


1  Mt'-')\ 

W. 

B.  CONKEY 

COMPANY 

cmcMso 

HAMMOND 

NEW  YORK 

Hi 

ing.  Nearly  all  news  print  and  other  short-lived  sheets 
are  made  principally  of  ground  wood. 


Sulphite  Pulp 

Sulphite  pulp  is  manufactured  by  cooking  uniform 
chips  of  spruce,  hemlock,  balsam  and  a  few  other  woods 
of  similar  kind  under  pressure  in  a  solution  of  calcium 
and  magnesium  bisulphite  to  dissolve  the  organic  binding 
material  from  the  cellulose  fibers.  Several  distinct  types 
of  sulphite  pulp,  each  having  a  definite  use  for  which  the 
other  cannot  easily  be  substituted,  are  produced— the 
property  of  the  pulp  depending  on  the  length  of  time  it  is 
cooked,  which  varies  from  six  to  twenty-four  hours.  The 
pulp  is  then  discharged  from  the  cooking  vat  or  digester 
and  washed  free  from  the  acids  and  other  substances 
which  have  performed  their  work.  In  many  instances  the 
pulp  is  further  refined  by  bleaching.  This  kind  of  pulp 
is  used  largely  in  making  cheaper  grades  of  bond  paper. 

The  Mitscherlkh  pulp  made  in  Germany,  and  some- 
times imported  into  this  country,  is  a  variation  of  the 
Sulphite  process  in  which  the  pulp  is  cooked  four  times 
as  long  as  is  generally  done  in  this  country,  and  under 
low  steam  pressure.  As  a  result  the  fiber  is  of  greater 
strength  which  naturally  makes  a  higher  grade  of  paper. 

ScH>A  Pulp 

Soda  pulp  is  made  by  cooking  uniform  chips  from 
poplar,  birch,  cottonwood,  basswood  and  other  broad 


W.  B.  CON  KEY  CO  MP  AMY 


leaf  woods  under  pressure  with  a  solution  of  caustic 
soda,  a  preparation  of  soda-ash  and  lime.  It  is  used  in 
connecdon  with  other  wood  and  rag  pulps  in  many 
wieties  of  yaper  but  particidarly  in  ^;gshdl  book  pai^ier 
wliere  bulking  qualities  are  desired  and  in  writings  and 
oHiers  requiring  a  smooth,  delicate  surface.  Practically 
the  entire  product  of  the  soda  process  is  bleached  before 
marketing. 


SuLPBATB  Pulp 


Sulfate  pulp  is  produced  by  cooking  uniform  chips 
of  various  woods  in  a  solution  containing  a  number  of 
varieties  of  soda  and  allied  products.  The  Sulphate  proc- 
ess is  an  outgrowth  of  the  soda  process  and  differs 
from  it  in  that  certain  of  the  raw  materials  used  ac- 
complish their  woric  and  at  the  same  time  undergo  a 
dhemical  change  resulting  in  sodium  sulfate.  However, 
Ike  sulphate  as  such  does  not  function  In  connection  with 
the  pulp,  but  is  converted  into  new  caustic  by-products. 

The  sulphate  process  produces  strong,  unbleached  pulp 
which  is  used  in  making  Kraft,  certain  brands  of  Cover, 
and  other  tough  poolers. 


Rag  Pulp 


Rag  pulp  is  made  principally  from  cotton  rags  or 
clippings  from  shirt  factories,  which  are  first  thoroughly 
washed,  then  shredded  by  machinery  and  passed  into  a 

Warn  174 


CONKEY 

COMPANY 

WW 

cmouGO 

BAMMOND 

NEW  mK 

[Si 

series  of  grinders  called  engines  which  rotate  in  water 
in  such  a  way  that  the  materials  are  drawn  under  the 
grinders  which  reduces  them  to  a  pulp. 

It  is  during  this  process  that  most  of  the  bleaching 
material,  some  sizing  and  colorii^  matter  are  added. 
When  the  grinding  is  completed  the  pulp  is  of  about  the 
same  consistency  as  milk.  It  is  then  ready  for  pumping 
to  the  paper-making  machine. 

Rag  pulp  is  used  in  making  the  best  grades  of  bonds, 
linens,  ledgers,  some  writings,  and  in  the  very  best  grades 
of  book  papers.  The  greater  the  proportion  of  rag  pulp 
used  the  better  the  paper  produced. 

BOOK  AND  CATALOG  PAPERS 

The  cheapest  kind  of  book  paper,  which  is  in  reality 
only  a  fair  grade  of  news  print,  is  made  from  ground 
wood  pulp.  Number  one  Eastern  book  and  the  better 
grades  are  made  from  sulphite  and  soda  pulp,  while 
Western  M.  F.  book  and  number  one  Super  papers  have 
old  paper  stock  as  a  base.  A  few  of  the  highest  grades 
are  made  from  a  combination  of  sulphite,  soda  and  rag 

pulp* 

The  better  grades  of  paper  are  frequently  dis- 
tinguished from  the  cheaper  by  use  of  the  term  "free 
sheets,"  which  means  that  those  papers  are  free  from 
ground  wood  which  is  a  detriment  to  the  life  of  the 
paper  because  it  has  not  been  so  treated  as  to  kill  all 
elements  of  decay.   The  first  noticeable  process  of  de- 

Psage  175 


w. 

B.  CONKEY 

COMPANY 

CHKttQO 

HAMMOND 

NEW  YORK 

composition  is  that  the  paper  turns  brown  after  a  short 
time  when  exposed  to  the  light  Hence  {Mtper  made  from 
ground  wood  is  not  stutahle  for  books  or  catalogs  that 
arc  expected  to  last  and  retain  a  good  appearance. 

Book  and  catalog  papers  come  in  a  variety  of  finishes 
as  well  as  colors  and  tints,  each  of  which  is  suited  to 
its  own  individual  use.  It  is  therefore  necessary  to  select 
the  quality  and  finish  best  adapted  to  the  kind  of  work 
in  hand. 

Different  kinds  of  paper  stock  are  frequently  given 
a  designating  name  by  the  manufacturer.  In  specifying 
the  kind  of  stock  desired  it  is  often  well  to  name  a  brand 
as  a  standard  of  quality.  Also  the  size  of  the  sheet, 
weight  to  the  ream,  the  finish  and  the  tint  or  color. 

• 

FiMisms  BY  Name 


Antique  finished  paper  is  practically  unfinished,  not 
having  been  calendered,  i.  e.,  ironed.  It  therefore  has  a 
rough,  uneven  surface,  technically  called  a  "low  finish." 

Laid  finish,  like  antique,  has  a  bw  finish,  but  differs 
m  that  it  is  water-marked  by  a  series  of  wires  lakl  on  the 
surface  of  the  dan^  toll  of  the  paper  machine  under 
which  the  paper  passes. 

Eggshell  finish  is  produced  by  using  antique  or  un- 
finished paper  and  calendering  it  untU  it  has  the  appear- 
ance of  the  shell  of  an  egg. 

Paper  finished  in  either  of  the  three  styles  above  men- 
tioned are  used  extensively  in  books  requirii^  consideraMe 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CWCACO  HAMMOND  NEW  YORK 


bulk  and  style — high  class.   Both  the  cheap  and  higher 
grades  of  paper  can  usually  be  had  in  these  finishes. 
Machine  finish  is  smoother  than  antique,  having  been 

calendered  until  the  antique  finish  was  removed.  It  is 
used  where  bulk  and  half-tone  illustrations  are  not  re- 
quired. 

English  finish  gives  a  particularly  smooth  surface, 
without  gloss,  which  is  capable  of  reproducing  half-tone 
illustrations  if  the  screen  is  not  too  fine.  It  is  extensively 
used  in  school  and  other  text-books  where  the  finest  de- 
tail in  illustrations  is  not  required.  It  has  the  added 
quality  of  absorbing  rather  than  reflecting  light,  which 
lends  comfort  to  the  eyes  of  the  reader. 

5.  &  S.  C,  means  that  the  paper  has  been  sized  and 
super-calendered.  Sizing  as  here  used  is  the  precipita- 
tion of  rosin  on  the  pulp  while  in  the  process  of  "beating" 
making  the  entire  sheet,  when  finished,  impervious  to 
ink,  i.  e.,  it  will  not  absorb  the  ink,  causing  it  to  show  on 
the  opposite  side  when  printed.  Calendering  is  a  process 
employed  to  give  paper  a  higher  or  more  glossy  finish. 

S.  &  S.  C.  is  largely  used  in  books  and  catalogs  re- 
quiring ntmierous  half-tone  illustrations,  which  are 
reproduced  on  paper  finished  in  this  way  in  a  manner 
second  only  to  the  best  enameled  papers.  Different 
grades  of  paper  of  varying  prices  are  finished  in  this 
style. 

Opacity,  originally  a  designating  name  by  the  manu- 
facturer has  become  generally  used  for  light  weight, 
opaque,  smooth  finish  paper  ranging  in  basic  weight  from 

177 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

MEW  YORK 


25  to  35  pounds  to  the  ream.  The  word  also  carries 
with  it  the  thought  of  opaqueness,  which  is  very  desirable 
in  all  thin  papers. 

Opacity  is  used  for  very  much  the  same  purposes  as 
S.  &  S.  C.  with  the  additional  advantage  of  li^^tness  of 
weight,  which  is  of  consklerable  importance  in  reducing 
the  weight  of  the  finished  article,  the  cost  of  postage  or 
shying. 

Enameled  or  coated  paper  is  made  by  taking  ordinary 
machine-finished  paper  and  coating  it  with  a  mixture  of 
china  clay,  satin  white  and  caseine  which  completely  fills 
in  the  pores  and  produces  a  smooth,  glossy,  mineral 
surface  capM^  of  reproducing  the  finest  screened  half- 


DM  Coated  paper  receives  the  same  coating  as  other 
enameled  paper  but  is  calendered  for  smoothness  only — 
not  for  gloss,  which  leaves  a  mellow  softness  not  obtain- 
able by  any  other  process. 

The  range  of  uses  for  enameled  paper  is  l^on  in 
number.  Suffice  it  to  say  here  that  the  class  of  woric 
and  eacactness  of  detail  in  illustrations  are  the  principles 
governing  its  use  in  books  and  catalogs.  It  comes  in 
different  grades,  the  average  of  which  will  not  stand  hard 
usage,  constant  folding,  etc.  However,  there  are  certain 
well  known  brands  that  stand  almost  any  amount  of 
folding  and  handling.  If  this  quality  is  desired  it  should 
always  he  so  stated. 


Page  178 


m 

mi 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 
cmcAco               K     oMD               NEW  mm 

Sizes  and  Weights 


Paper  of  every  kind  is  made  in  various  sizes  and 
weights  and  is  sold  by  the  pound  or  ream.  The  usual 
count  is  500  sheets  to  the  ream.  The  ordinary  sizes  of 
book  and  catalog  papers  are  24x36,  25x38,  28x42  and 
32x44.  They  are  also  made  in  double  sizes,  as  36x48, 
38x50  and  44x64  and  can  be  had  in  any  size  when  ordered 
in  large  quantities.  The  weights  range  from  40  to  200 
pounds  to  the  ream. 

Enameled  papers  are  nearly  always  shipped  in  cases 
containing  approximately  500  pounds.  The  cheaper 
grades  most  always  come  in  long  soft  folds,  securely 
wrapped  in  heavy  paper  to  insure  protection  from  the 
elements  and  rough  handling. 

COVER  STOCK 

Cover  paper,  as  the  name  indicates,  is  used  for  mak- 
ing covers  for  catalogs,  booklets,  the  cheaper  grade  of 
books,  and  as  end  sheets  for  hard  bound  books.  It  is 
also  used  for  envelopes,  direct-by-mail  folders  and  other 
forms  of  advertising  matter.  It  can  be  obtained  in  a 
great  variety  of  grades,  weights,  thicknesses,  tints,  colors 
and  blends  and  in  antique,  which  is  rough  or  unfinished; 
ripple,  which  is  wavy;  and  smooth  plate  finishes. 

The  three  r^ular  sizes  of  cover  paper  measured  in 
inches  are  20x26,  weighing  from  25  to  130  pounds  to 
the  ream,  23x33,  weighing  from  36j4  to  190  pounds  to 

Page  179 


m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

MMMOITO                        jiEW  YORK 

IP 

the  ream  and  26x40,  weighing  from  50  to  130  pomids 
to  the  ream.  It  is  made  also  in  any  special  size  and 
weight  desired,  but  if  a  l^^er  wei^^t  or  a  different  size 
tlian  above  stated  is  ordered  in  small  quantities  a  higher 
ffice  is  charged. 

It  is  shipped  in  cases. 

BOMDS,  LEDGERS  AND  FLAT  WRITING  PAPERS 

Bonds,  writings  and  ledger  papers  are  made  from 
wious  cpnbinations  of  rag,  sulf^ite  and  soda  pulp ;  the 
■wia  pulp,  however,  is  used  mostly  in  writing  papers  to 
five  them  the  mdlow  softness  so  much  desired. 

The  grade  of  the  paper  varies  according  to  the  portion 
used  of  these  different  pulps.  As  a  rule  the  greater 
the  rag  content  the  better  the  grade  of  paper  and  conse- 
quently the  higher  the  price.  The  cheaper  bond  papers 
are  made  entirely  from  sulphite  pulp,  while  the  very  best 
grades  are  wholly  made  from  new  rag  pulp. 

The  quality  of  the  paper  also  varies  according  to 
the  treatment  given  the  pulp— the  strength  of  the 
chemicals  used;  the  steam  pressure;  the  duration  of  the 
cooking;  the  difference  in  the  beating  of  the  pulp  and 
by  varying  the  speed  at  which  the  pulp  is  run  over  the 
paper  madiine.  Thos  very  dissimilar  sheets  may  be 
produced  with  exactly  the  same  ingredients. 

The  pulp  used  in  the  cheaper  grades  of  bonds  is 
usually  cooked  faster  at  a  higher  steam  pressure  and 
is  run  over  the  paper  machine  at  a  much  Wgher  rate 
of  speed  than  in  higher  grades  of  bond  papers. 
Warn  m 


m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 
oncaco                hammono                hzw  york  I 

the  ream  and  26x40,  weighiiig  from  50  to  130  potnids 
to  the  ream.  It  is  made  also  in  any  ^>eciai  size  and 
wc^ht  de^red,  hot  if  a  lighter  weight  or  a  different  size 
than  above  stated  is  ordered  in  small  quantities  a  higher 
price  is  charged. 

It  is  shipped  in  cases. 
BOMDS,  LEDGERS  AND  FLAT  WRITING  PAPERS 

Bonds,  writings  and  lecher  papers  are  made  from 
wious  cwnhinations  of  rag,  sulphite  and  soda  pulp ;  the 
soda  palp,  however,  is  used  mostly  in  writing  papers  to 
give  them  the  mellow  softness  so  much  desired. 

The  grade  of  the  paper  varies  according  to  the  portion 
used  of  these  different  pulps.  As  a  rule  the  greater 
the  rag  content  the  better  the  grade  of  paper  and  conse- 
quently the  higher  the  price.  The  cheaper  bond  papers 
are  made  entirely  from  sulphite  pulp,  while  the  very  best 
grades  are  wholly  made  from  new  rag  pulp. 

The  quality  of  the  paper  also  varies  according  to 
the  treatment  given  the  pulp— the  strength  of  the 
chemicals  used ;  the  steam  pressure ;  the  duration  of  the 
codcing;  the  difference  in  the  beating  of  the  pulp  and 
by  varying  the  speed  at  which  the  pulp  is  run  over  the 
paper  machine.  Thus  very  dissimilar  sheets  may  be 
pwluced  with  exactly  the  same  ingredients. 

The  pulp  used  in  the  cheaper  grades  of  bonds  is 
usually  cooked  faster  at  a  higher  steam  pressure  and 
is  run  over  the  paper  machine  at  a  much  higher  rate 
of  speed  than  in  higher  grades  of  hmd  papers. 


Vi 

U 


03 


J) 
a. 
a. 

CD 

Qi 
< 


Pi 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKACO                      HAMMOND                       NEW  YORK 

1 

The  slower  the  machine  is  run  the  more  even  the 
formation  of  the  fiber,  due  to  the  opportunity  it  has  of 
knitting  closely  together.  The  clouded  effect  sometimes 
noticed  in  cheaper  grades  of  paper  is  due  to  the  pulp 
having  been  run  over  the  machine  so  rapidly  that  the 
nUBons  of  little  fibers  had  not  sufficient  time  to  spread 
evenly  over  the  web  of  the  machine. 

Sizing 

The  cheaper  grades  of  bonds,  ledgers  and  writing 
paper  are  frequently  sized  only  in  the  pulp  beater.  All 
of  the  better  grades,  however,  in  addition  to  the  sizing 
mixed  into  the  pulp  as  it  passes  through  the  beater,  are 
"tub  sized/'  i.  e.,  the  paper  passes  through  a  size  bath 
near  the  dry  end  of  the  paper  machine. 

Some  of  the  very  best  and  most  expensive  kinds  of 
ledger  paper,  after  passing  through  the  tub  bath  are  lightly 
rolled  and  allowed  to  stand  for  several  days  before  the 
finishmg  process  is  begun.  This  permits  every  fiber 
to  become  thoroughly  saturated  with  the  sizing,  which 
is  of  particular  advantage  when  the  paper  is  used  where 
frequent  erasures  are  necessary.  Paper  treated  in  this 
way  can  be  erased  over  any  number  of  times  and  still 
retain  a  good  writing  surface. 

Drying  and  Finishing 

The  lower  grades  of  paper  are  usually  dried  on  the 
paper  machine  by  passing  over  steam  heated  rolls. 

Fiftge  183 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 


Medium  grades  pass  over  revolving  fans  which  release 
siqieriieated  mr  causing  the  paper  to  dry  quickly  and 
produce  wliat  is  called  air-dried  piqier. 

The  best  grades  of  paper  are  pole  dried  in  what  is 
commonly  known  as  a  loft,  and  these  are  called  lolt-dried 
papers.  In  loft  drying  the  paper  is  hung  over  poles  and 
allowed  to  remain  in  the  artificially  heated  room  for  a 
period  of  about  two  weeks.  It  is  then  ready  for  the 
platers  which  give  it  the  desired  finish  by  means  of 
piesni^  the  plate  or  graining  mirtierial  such  as  pure  linen 
cMhs  to  ghre  the  linen  finish,  etc^  between  metal  boards 
wilh  heavy  hydraulic  presses. 

On  the  lower  grades  of  paper  the  finish  is  usually 
put  on  by  ordinary  calender  rolls,  though  of  course  these 
grades  can  be  firdshed  in  a  special  way  if  desired,  the 
game  im  the  b 


CumifG  AND  Packing 

All  bonds  and  Flat  Writing  papers  are  cut  and  ac- 
ctu-ately  trimmed  to  writing  paper  sizes,  such  as  17x22, 
17x28,  19x24  and  the  double  of  these;  then  wrapped 
and  sealed  in  ream  padoges. 

Le<%er  papers  are  made  in  a  much  larger  range  of 
sizes  beginning  with  16x21  and  running  as  laige  as  28x34, 
and  in  some  instances  even  larger. 

In  bond  papers  the  substance  weights  are  13,  16,  20 
and  24  pounds  based  on  a  ream  17x22  inches. 

Ledger  pikers  are  seldom  made  lighter  than  20  pounds 

JTwIBw  a  VP 


1 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKMiO                    HAmiOND                     NEW  YOIK 

to  the  ream,  but  run  as  high  as  36  pounds  to  the  ream 
in  size  17x22  inches. 

Writing  papers  are  seldom  made  lighter  than  16 
pounds  to  the  ream,  but  frequently  run  as  high  as  28 
pounds  to  the  ream  in  size  17x22. 


PARCHMENT  AND  ONIONSKIN  PAPERS 

Parchment,  Onionskin  and  similar  papers  are  made 
from  the  same  substance  as  the  bonds,  ledger  and 
writings,  but  are  treated  by  a  different  process  and  are 
run  on  an  e^iedaUy  equipped  machine,  which  gives  them 
an  entirely  dtfiarent  appearance. 

UNIVERSAL  PAPER  TRADE  CUSTOMS 
(500  Sheets  to  Ream) 

Print:  Minimum  basb  of  weight  to  be  24x36,  32  lbs. 
Each  pound  less  down  to  25  lbs.,  5c  per  cwt  additional. 
Below  25  lbs.  special  prices. 

M,  F.  Book:  Minimtun  basis  25x38,  45  lbs.  Each 
pound  below  45  lbs.  down  to  40  lbs.,  3c  per  cwt.  addi- 
tional; below  40  lbs.  down  to  30  lbs.,  5c  per  cwt.  ad- 
ditional. For  each  pound  bdow  30  lbs.,  10c  per  cwt 
mdditionaL 

Super-calendered  Book:  Minimum  basis  25x38,  50 
lbs.  For  each  pound  below  50  lbs.  down  to  45  lbs.,  3c  per 
cwt.  additional.   For  each  pound  below  45  lbs.  down  to 

Fife  Its 


i 

m 
m 

W,  B,  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKlfiO                      HAMMOND                       NEW  YORK 

35  Ihs^  5c  per  cwt  additionaL  For  each  pound  below  35 
His.,  10c  per  cwt.  additioiial. 

Coaied  Book  (2  sades) :  Miliiiiiiim  basis  25x38, 70  lbs. 
For  each  pound  below  70  lbs.,  5c  per  cwt.  additional. 

Paper  mills  being  unable  to  furnish,  etc.,  5fo  clause. 


ESTIMATING  QUANTITY  OF  STOCK 

The  following  will  be  found  to  be  a  convenient  rule 
to  detenmne  the  amount  of  stock  required  on  catalog 
and  book  woik: 

Divide  the  total  number  of  pages  in  the  book  by  the 
number  of  pages  in  the  form.  The  result  will  be  the 
number  of  reams  necessary  for  each  one  thousand  copies 
of  the  job.   Spoilage  to  be  added. 

Books,  Catak)gs  and  Pamphlets  are  most  always 
printed  In  4,  8,  16,  32  or  64  page  forms. 

Under  the  above  rule  the  first  diing  to  determine  is 
the  proper  number  of  pages  to  the  form  in  which  to 
run  your  job.  Assuming  that  it  is  a  book  of  256  pages 
with  a  trim  size  of  5}ix7yi  inches,  and  allowing  J4  inch 
lU  around  for  trim,  i.  c,  add  inch  to  width  and  J4 
inch  to  lei^  of  page  making  die  size  5^x8  inches. 
Then,  by  wiply  multipfyii^  eadi  number  by  4  we  find 
our  requirements  to  be  a  sheet  22x32  inches  for  a  16 
page  form.  (4X4=16.) 

Following  the  rule  we  next  divide  256,  the  number 
of  pages  in  the  book,  by  16,  the  number  of  pages  in  the 
form  (256-7-16—16)  we  find  16  to  be  the  number  of 
teams  of  paper  22ac32  inches  required  for  1000  books. 


CONKEY 

COMPANY 

cmcAco 

HAMMOND 

NEW  YOBIC 

If  run  in  32  page  form,  the  paper  will  require  to  be 
just  double  the  size,  or  32x44  inches,  and  the  number  of 
reams  per  1000  books  only  one  half  the  amount,  or  8 
reams. 

To  this  must  be  added  from  5%  to  10%  for  spoilage, 
depending  upon  the  length  of  run,  quality  and  size  of 
stock  and  number  of  colors  of  ink  used. 


HOW  TO  FIND  WEIGHTS  OF  PAPER 

All  weights  of  stock  are  based  on  a  size  of  25x38. 
To  find  necessary  weight  use  following  method :  Divide 
the  required  size  and  basis  of  weight  by  the  size  basis 
first,  using  cancellation  process  as  per  example: 

Basis  stock  desired  25X38=50  lb. 
Stock  wanted,  size  40X60=Wt.  ? 

Example:  25x-3»^>  19)2400(126 lbs. 

-4ex60-5aib.  19^ 

20  2  50 

120 
114 
6 

W 


Fftgft  187 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

OOClfiO                     UUmOMD                      MEW  YORK 

m 

CONVENIENT  TABLE  FOR  FIGURING  STOCK 


£jr^lafiiiltofi.-*-Fiiid  the  mnnber  of  pieces  that  cut  out 
of  the  sife  selected.  Find  liuit  nmnber  in  the  left-hand 
colmmi — ^follow  across  to  tfie  figure  in  the  column  des- 
ignating the  quantity  required  (quantity  shown  at  the 
head  of  each  column).  For  instance,  a  job  cuts  16  out 
of  a  sheet;  the  order  is  for  3,500  pieces— see  figure  16  in 
Hie  left-told  oolnmn  and  follow  actoss  to  the  eighth 
coliinin.  The  %ore  is  219.  TfoB  means  that  ^  job 
gBfoires  219  i^ieets.  No  allowance  is  figured  for  waste 

(Table  on  next  page.) 


W.  !•  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO  HjmMOiro  NEW  YORK 


1   500  1000 

2              250  500 

3  ..  167  334 

A             125  250 

5               100  200 

6                84  16^ 

7                72  143 

8               63  125 

9               56  112 

10...            50  100 

II. .•>•••••  46  91 

12.******-'  ^  84 

13..   39  77 

14   36  72 

15   34  67 

16   32  63 

17   30  50 

18   28  56 

19   27  53 

20   25  50 

21   24  48" 

22   23  46 

23    22  44 

24   21  42 

2S  ...  20  40 

26   20  W 

27   19  .38 

28   18  36 

29   18  36 

30   17  34 

31  • . .  •   17  33 

32   16  32 

33   16  31 

34   IS  30 

35   15  29 

36   14  28 

37  •••••  ••»•  14 

38   14  27 

39   13  26 

40   13  25 


-.pn  icn»  onnn  2S00  3000  3S00  4000  4500  sow 
-  1      2000  2500  3000  3500  4000  4500  bUUU 

SO  1000  1250  1500  1750  2000  2250  2500 
500  667  834  1000  1167  1334  1500  1667 
^  sno  625  750  875  1000  1125  1250 
iSo  400j§  6SJgO_800  900  1000 


250  334 

215  286 

188  250 

167  223 

150  200 


417  500  584 

358  429  500 

313  375  438 

278  334  389 

250  300  350 


667  750  834 

572  643  715 

500  563  625 

445  500  556 

400  450  500 


137  182 

126  168 

116  154 

108  144 

100  134 


228  273  319 

209  250  292 

193  231  270 

179  215  250 

167  200  234 


364  410  455 

334  375  417 

308  347  385 

286  322  358 

267  300  334 


94  125 

89  118 

84  112 

79  106 

75  100 


157  188  219 

148  177  206 

139  167  195 

132  158  185 

125  150  175 


250  282  313 

236  265  295 

223  250  279 

211  237  264 

200  225  250 


72  96  120  143  167 

69  91  114  137  160 

66  87  109  131  153 

63  84  105  125  146 

60  80  100  120  140 


191  215  239 

182  205  228 

174  196  218 

167  188  209 

160  180  200 


58  77  97  116  135 

56  75  93  112  130 

54  72  90  108  125 

54  72  87  103  121 

51  67  84  100  117 


154  174  193 

149  167  186 

143  161  179 

138  156  173 

134  150  167 


49 
47 
46 
45 
43 


65 
63 
61 

59 
58 


81 
79 
76 
74 
72 


97  113 

94  110 

91  107 

89  103 

86  100 


130  146  162 

125  141  157 

122  137  152 

118  133  148 

115  129  143 


l2 — 56    70    84  98  112   125  139 

41     55    68    82  95   109  122  136 

£    53    S    79  93   106   119  132 

m    52    65    77  90  103   116  131 

§    ^    ^  ^ 
 —  Sgel89 


m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CWCACO                      HAMMOND                       NEW  YORK 

IP- 

COMPARATIVE  WEIGHTS  OF  BOOK  PAPERS 


Coated  Two  Si 


Substance  Weight  in  Pounds — ^Basis  25x38 


Size 

m 

n 

80 

90 

100 

120 

 55 

64 

73 

82 

91 

109 

  60 

70 

80 

90 

100 

120 

26  x29  

  48 

56 

64 

72 

80 

95 

 63 

74 

84 

95 

105 

126 

 74 

86 

99 

111 

124 

148 

m  x44  

  78 

91 

104 

117 

130 

155 

 82 

96 

110 

124 

137 

165 

 96 

112 

128 

144 

160 

190 

30^x41  

 79 

92 

105 

119 

132 

158 

32  x44  

 89 

104 

119 

133 

148 

178 

33  x46  

 96 

112 

128 

144 

160 

192 

35  x45 

100 

116 

132 

149 

$99 

36  x48  

 110 

128 

146 

164 

182 

218 

38  3tS0  

 120 

140 

160 

180 

200 

240 

»*•••••  13<Gt 

184 

210 

238 

264 

316 

42  x56  

 148 

172 

198 

222 

248 

296 

44  x56  

 156 

182 

206 

234 

260 

310 

 178 

208 

238 

266 

296 

356 

m 

W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHIOIfib                    HAiaiQMD  NEW 

COMPARATIVE  WEIGHTS  OF  BOOK  PAPERS 

Uncoated  Book  Papers 
Substance  Weight  in  Pounds — Basis  25x38 


40 

50 

60 

70 

80 

100 

...  29y2 

37 

45 

52 

5954 

74 

24  x36  

...  36 

45 

55 

64 

73 

91 

...AO 

CO 

60 

70 

80 

100 

26  x29  

...  32 

40 

48 

56 

64 

80 

...  44 

55 

66 

77 

88 

109 

?^  x42  

^2 

99 

124 

28  x44  

...  52 

65 

78 

91 

104 

130 

...  64 

80 

96 

112 

128 

160 

30Hx41  

...  53 

66 

79 

92 

105 

132 

32  x44  

...  59 

74 

89 

104 

119 

148 

...  64 

80 

96 

112 

128 

160 

...  63 

79 

95 

110 

126 

157 

35  x45  

...  66 

83 

100 

116 

132 

166 

...  72 

90 

110 

128 

146 

182 

38  x50. ....    . . . . 

• . .  80 

100 

120 

140 

160 

20O 

41  x61  

...106 

132 

158 

184 

210 

264 

42  xS6  

...100 

124 

148 

172 

198 

248 

...104 

130 

156 

182 

208 

260 

148 

178 

208 

238 

296 

Fage  191 


i 

CHICAGO  H 

KEY  COMPANY 
AMMOND  mrnrmm. 

m 

COMPARATIVE  SIZES  AND  WEIGHTS  BONDS, 
LEDGERS,  AND  FLAT  WRITINGS 

Showing  Stanssabd  Substance  Weights 

Double  sizes  arc  figured  at  double  the  weight  of  single  sizes. 

Substance  Weight  in  Pounds,  Basis  17x22 


Size 

13 
lbs. 

16 
lbs. 

20 
lbs. 

24  28 
lbs.  lbs. 

32 
lbs. 

36 
lbs. 

40 
lbs. 

44 

lbs. 

16  x21 

11^ 

14541  18 

21541  25 

1  2854 

1  3254 

36 

1  39^ 

16  x42 

23 

29  1  36   1  43   1  50   1  57 

65 

72 

1  79 

17  z22 

13   1  16   1  20   1  24   1  28   1  32 

36   1  40   1  44 

17  x28 

16541  20541  25541  30541  35541  40541  46   |  51    |  56 

18  x23     1  14541  17541  22   |  265^1  31    |  3554|  40  |  4454|  48}4 

18  x46     1  29 

35   1  44   1  53   1  62   1  71    1  80   i  89 

97 

19  x24     1  16 

19541  24541  29^|  34   |  39   |  44   |  49 

 -iigi 

If  x26     1  17   1  21    1  26^1  31541  37   |  42J^|  47^|  53   |  58 

20  x28     1  19541  24   |  30   |  36   i  42   |  48   |  54   |  60   |  66 

23 

29   1  36   1  43 

50  1  57   1  65   1  72 

79 

22  x25H 

19^ 

24 

30 

36 

42   1  48   1  54 

60 

66 

22  x34 

26 

32 

40 

48 

56   1  64   1  72 

80 

88 

22jl^3c22^4 

1754 

2154 

S7 

3254 

38   1  43541  48H 

54 

5^ 

22^x24^ 

19 

23^ 

29^ 

3554 

4154 

47 

53 

6S 

2mMH  1  2254 

27^ 

34^1  41 

48 

55 

em 

2216x34     1  26541  32541  41    |  49 

5^54 

6^54 

82  1  90 

22^x343^  1  27    ;  33    ;  ^:    ;  '  ^    '  58    1  66541  74HI  83    |  91j^ 

23  x2454 

19HI  24   1  30   1  36    ,  '2      48    |  54    |  6054 1  6654 

23  x36 

29 

35   1  44  i  53   1  62   1  71    1  80 

89   1  97 

24  x38 

32 

39 

49  1  59  1  68  1  78   1  88 

98  1107 

24^4x2454 

21   1  2554 

32   1  38541  45   |  SW]  58 

64  \n% 

24^x28>6 

24^1  30  1  37541  45   |  52541  59541  67 

745^1  82 

24j4x29 

24541  30541  38  |  45541  53   |  61    |  6854|  76  |  8354 

2454x3854  I  33   |  40J4|  50541  6054|  70541  805^1  91 

101  |111 

2554x44 

39  1  48   1  60   1  72  1  84   1  96  1106 

120  1132 

28  x34 

33 

41    1  51    j  61    1  71    1  81    1  92  |102 

112 

34  x44  IS2 

64  1  80  1  96  1112  1128  1144  1160 

176 

SPECIAL  INFORMATION 

How  TO  Obtain  Copyrights 
Assignment  of  Copyrights 

iNmtNATlONAL  COFIfllGHTS 

Finau' 


HOW  TO  OBTAIN  COPYRIGHTS 

THE  United  States  Copyright  Law  provides  that  all 
books,  catalogs,  booklets,  etc.,  must  be  set  up  and 
plated  (if  run  from  plates),  printed  and  bound  in  the 
Uilited  States,  and  that  they  must  bear  the  copyright 
notice  in  order  to  be  subject  to  copyright. 

Either  on  the  same  day  the  book  is  published,  or 
promptly  thereafter,  blank  application  and  affidavit  form 
"A-1,"  which  may  be  obtained  from  the  United  States 
Copyri^^t  Office  at  Washington,  D.  C,  must  be  filled 
out  and  sworn  to,  and  mailed  with  two  copies  of  the 
book  for  deposit  with  the  Copyright  Office,  tc^;eiier  with 
a  Post  Office  money  order  for  the  required  fee  of  one 
dollar,  made  payable  to  the  Register  of  Copyrights.  The 
outside  of  the  package  should  be  marked  "Books  for 
copyright  registration." 

If  the  package  is  then  delivered  to  the  Post  Office, 
tlie  Postmaster  will,  «qx)n  request,  sign  a  receipt  for  the 
package,  which  the  publisher  makes  out.  This  receipt 
should  contain  the  name  of  the  book,  the  date,  and  the 
fact  that  the  copies  are  to  be  transmitted  to  the  Register 
of  Copyrights  for  the  purpose  of  registration  of  copy- 
right The  Postmaster  is  required  by  law  to  forward 
these  copies  to  the  Register  of  Copyrights  without  ex- 
pense to  the  sender. 

After  a  few  days  a  receipt  under  seal  will  come  from 
the  Copyright  Office,  certifying  that  the  books  have  been 


received  wMi  a  remittaiice  and  s^limtkm,  and  that  flie 
copyn^  lias  been  duly  recorded. 


Hemes  OF  COFYSIGHT 

The  notke  of  csipyrii^  must  consist  either  of  the 

finied  by  the  name  of  the  copyright  proprietor,  and  if 
the  work  be  a  printed  literary,  musical  or  dramatic 
work,  the  notice  shall  include  also  the  year  in  which 
the  copyright  was  secured  by  publication. 

The  notice  of  copyright  must  be  applied  upon  the 

titie  ptfe  of  the  hoolc,  or  lie  pofe  immediately  f  dkiw- 



In  the  case  of  mnslGal  work,  the  ncrtice  should  ap- 
pear either  upon  its  title  page,  or  upon  the  first  page 
of  each  piece  of  music;  but  one  notice  of  copyright  in 
each  volume  or  number  of  a  work  is  required. 

Tbb  BCTATioif  or  CoratiGHT 

The  duration  of  the  term  of  copyright  is  twenty- 
eight  years.  This  term  may  be  extended  for  a  further 
term  of  twenty-eight  years  by  the  author  of  the  work, 
if  living,  or  by  the  widow,  widower,  or  children;  or,  if 
they  be  nc^  living,  then  by  the  au^r's  execitfors,  inr 
in  the  absence  of  a  will,  by  his  next  of  kin. 

ApiilicalMMi  for  ^  octenskm  must  be  made  to  the 
Copyright  Office,  and  duly  rq[istered  within  one  year 

Taae  196 


received  with  a  remittance  and  application,  and  that  the 
copyrii^  has  been  duly  recorded. 

NonCE  OF  COPYSIGMT 

The  notice  of  copyright  must  consist  either  of  the 
word  "Copyr^t,"  or  the  abbreviation  "Copr.,'"  accom- 
panied by  the  name  of  the  copyright  proprietor,  and  if 
the  work  be  a  printed  literary,  musical  or  dramatic 
work,  the  notice  shall  include  also  the  year  in  which 
the  copyright  was  secured  by  publication. 

The  notice  of  copyright  must  be  applied  upon  the 
title  page  of  the  ioc^  or  the  page  immediately  f  dk>w- 

CP 

In  the  case  of  musical  work,  the  notice  should  ap- 
pear either  upon  its  title  page,  or  upon  the  first  page 
of  each  piece  of  music;  but  one  notice  of  copyright  in 
each  volume  or  number  of  a  work  is  required. 

TmB  BimATION  OF  CbFYUGHT 

The  duration  of  the  term  of  copyright  is  twenty- 
eight  years.  This  term  may  be  extended  for  a  further 
term  of  twenty-eight  years  by  the  author  of  the  work, 
if  Uving,  or  by  the  widow,  widower,  or  children;  or,  if 
they  he  not  living,  then  by  the  andior's  executors,  or 
in  the  absence  of  a  wiH,  by  his  next  of  km. 

Application  for  this  extension  must  be  made  to  the 
Copyright  OfHce,  and  duly  registered  within  one  year 

Fii«e  196 


cmcjiGO 


W.  B,  CONKEY  COMPANY 


HAMMOND 


NEW  TOMC 


prior  to  the  expiration  of  the  origitial  term.  For  the 
renewal  of  such  copyright  a  Renewal  Form,  "R-1,"  is 
provided  by  the  Copyright  Office,  which  may  be  had  upon 
request 

The  Protection  of  Titles 

The  cases  which  have  thus  far  been  settled  in  litiga- 
tion indicate  that  there  is  nothing  in  the  present  copy- 
right law  which  gives  to  the  author  the  exclusive  right 
to  the  title  of  his  particular  work.  There  may  be  any 
number  of  books  and  stories  brought  out  by  different 
authors  bearing  the  same  title,  so  long  as  each  one  is 
distinct  and  original. 

Assignment  of  G)pyiights 

A  copyright  may  be  assigned,  granted,  or  mortgaged, 
by  an  instrument  in  writing  signed  by  the  owner  of 
the  copyright.  No  special  blank  form  for  assignment 
is  issued  by  the  Copyright  Office. 

Recobding  Assignments 

Every  assignment  of  cqiyright  should  be  recorded 
in  the  Copyright  Office  within  three  calendar  months 
after  its  execution  in  the  United  States,  or  within  six 
calendar  months  after  its  execution  without  the  limits 
of  the  United  States,  "in  default  of  which  it  shall  be 


Page  199 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CUKMIO                    BMniOND                     HEW  YmK 

1 

as  against  any  subscqnent  purchaser  or  mortgagee 
for  a  valuable  consideration,  without  notice,  whose  as- 
signment has  been  duly  recorded." 

The  original  instrument  of  ass^inment  should  be 
sent  to  the  Copyright  OflScc  to  be  piaoed  on  record. 
After  having  been  recorded,  a  cot^te  of  record  under 
acai  of  the  Copyright  Office  is  attached,  and  it  is  then 
rettimed  by  post.  If  the  sender  desires  to  have  it  re- 
turned by  registered  post,  ten  cents  postage  for  the  Post 
Office  registry  fee  should  be  sent  in  addition  to  the  re- 
cording fee. 

Recxmuung  Fees 

For  recording  and  certifying  any  instrument  in  writ- 
ing for  the  assignment  of  copyright,  or  any  license  to 
make  use  of  copyrighted  material,  or  for  any  copy  of 
such  assignment  or  license,  duly  certified,  if  not  over 
300  words  in  lei^,  the  fee  is  $1.00;  if  more  than  300 
wofds  and  less  than  1,000  woids  in  length,  $2.00;  if 
more  than  tjm  words  in  length,  $1.00  additional  for 
eadi  1,000  words  or  fraction  thereof  over  300  words. 

For  recording  the  transfer  of  the  proprietorship  of 
copyrighted  articles,  the  fee  is  10c  for  each  title  of  the 
book  or  other  article,  in  addition  to  tiie  f ee  prescribed  for 
mxn^  the  instrtmient  of  assigmneot 


Page  200 


mi 

m 

w. 

CHICAGO 

B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

muniONIi                new  York 

(jOPYRiGHT  Registration  of  Periodicals 


Section  3  of  the  present  copyright  law  provides  "pro- 
tection (for)  all  the  copyrightable  component  parts  of 
tile  work  copyrighted,  and  all  matter  therein  in  which 
copyright  is  already  subsisting,  but  without  extending 
the  duration  or  scope  of  such  copyright.  The  cop3rright 
upon  composite  works  or  periodicals  shall  give  to  the 
proprietor  thereof,  all  the  rights  in  respect  thereto  which 
he  would  have  if  each  part  were  individually  copyrighted 
under  this  Act." 

The  issuing  of  such  periodical  with  the  required 
copyright  notice  printed  therein,  should  be  done  before 
making  any  application  to  the  Copyright  Office  for  reg- 
istration. 

Promptly  after  the  publication  of  each  issue,  send 
two  copies  thereof  to  the  Copyright  Office  at  Washing- 
ton, D.  C,  with  an  application  for  registration  (upon 
Form  "B-l"),  and  a  remittance  for  the  statutory  fee 
of  $1.00,  which  sum  includes  the  cost  of  a  certificate 
under  seal.  Such  certificates  should  be  preserved,  for 
they  are  "admitted  in  any  Court  as  prima  facie  evidence 
of  the  facts  stated  therein." 

Publishers  who  desire  to  avoid  the  trouble  of  filling 
out  a  separate  application  form,  and  of  making  a  sepa- 
rate remittance  for  eadi  issue,  may  send  in  advance  a 
sum  to  be  placed  to  their  crejdit,  accompanied  by  gen- 
eral application  (upon  Form  "6-2"),  requesting  regis- 
trations to  be  made  thereafter  upon  the  prompt  deposit 

Page  201 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY* 

NEW  YORK 


in  the  Copyright  Office  of  the  copies  of  the  successive 
issues,  as  they  are  published.  After  this  has  been  done, 
two  copies  of  each  issue  should  he  mailed  to  the  Copy- 
ri|^t  O&ct  promptly  alter  publicatioti,  with  a  slip  which 
is  sii{^lied  in  blank  by  the  Copyr^t  Office,  giving  the 
exact  date  of  publication  of  the  issue,  i.  e.,  "the  earliest 
date  when  copies  of  the  first  authorized  edition  were 
placed  on  sale,  or  sold,  or  publicly  distributed  by  the 
prq>rietor  of  the  copyright,  or  under  his  authority." 

CONTXIBimON  TO  PERIODICALS 

Contributions  to  periodicals  may  be  copyr^ted  by 

sending  one  complete  copy  of  the  periodical  containing 
the  contribution,  with  appHcation  and  fee,  which  is  $1.00. 
No  affidavit  is  required. 


Books  Published  Abboad  in  the  English  Language 

In  order  to  copyright  in  the  United  States  a  book 
first  published  abroad  in  the  English  language,  it  is 
necessary  to  deposit  in  the  Copyright  Office  at  Wash- 
ioglQii,  D.  C,  not  later  than  sixty  days  after  it  is  pub- 
lished abroad,  one  ccmi^^ete  copy  of  the  foreign  edition, 
wi^  a  request  for  the  reservation  of  the  copyright,  and 
a  statement  of  the  name  and  nationality  of  the  author 
and  of  the  copyright  proprietor,  and  of  the  date  of  pub- 
lication of  the  said  book.  "This  secures  to  the  author 
or  proprietor  an  ad  interim  copyright,  which  shall  have 
vim  202 


U  CONKEY 

COMPANY 

CmCiKGO 

HAMMOND 

NEW  HMK 

all  the  force  and  effect  given  to  copyright  by  this  act 
(the  regular  copyright  law),  and  shall  endure  until  the 
expiration  of  four  months  after  such  a  deposit  in  the 
Copyright  Office."  This  ad  interim  copyright  gives  ample 
time  for  the  foreign  publisher  to  re-ptibhsh  the  book  in 
^e  United  States  in  conf  ormity  with  the  United  States 
Copyright  Law. 


Copyright  Convention  of  the  Pan-American 
Mbpublics  and  the  United  States 

On  August  11, 1910,  a  copyright  convention  was  con- 
cluded and  signed  at  Buenos  Aires,  between  the  United 
States  and  other  American  Republics,  which  became  ef- 
fective July  13,  1914,  between  the  United  States  and  the 
following  countries:  Dominican  Republic,  Guatemala, 
Honduras,  Panama,  Nicaragua  and  Ecuador.  The  gov- 
ernments of  Bolivia,  Brazil,  Costa  Rica,  Haiti,  Paraguay, 
Pent,  Salvador  and  Uruguay  have  announced  through 
diplomatic  channels,  Ihe  adhesion  of  those  countries  to 
this  convention. 

The  reciprocal  recognition  of  rights  granted  by  this 
convention  under  Article  3  follows : 

"The  acknowledgment  of  a  copyright  obtained  in 
one  state,  in  conformity  with  its  laws,  shall  produce 
its  effects  of  full  right  in  all  the  other  states  with- 
out the  necessity  of  complying  with  any  other  for- 
mality, provided  always  there  shall  appear  in  the 
work  a  statement  that  indicates  the  reservation  of 

Fiage  203 


m 


W.  B,  CONKCY  COMPANY 

NEW 


Ac  prorcrty  right.'*  An  example  would  be:  All 
R^iits  Keserred,  or  Copyright  under  the  Article 
of  the  Copyright  Convention  of  the  PSm-American 
RqmMics  and  the  United  States,  August  11.  1910. 
Some  pnbliahers  indade  both  expressions. 

IHISBNATIONAL  COFVSIGBTS 

The  so-called  International  Copyright  Law  is  value- 
less so  far  as  the  United  States  is  concerned.  The 
United  States  is  not  a  member  of  the  International  Copy- 
right Union  as  established  at  the  Convention  of  Bern, 
and  cannot  join  this  Union  so  long  as  the  present  danse 
in  the  American  Copyri^^  Law  stands,  requiring  all 
books  m  M  cxmplet^  manof actored  within  the  United 
States  in  order  to  secure  copyright.  Thus  it  is  evident 
that  registration  at  Washington  does  not  secure  protec- 
tion abroad.  However,  mutual  copyright  protection  has 
been  arranged  by  special  treaties  with  most  of  the  for- 
eign nations  where  copyri^t  is  really  desirable,  which 
-grant  to  citizens  of  the  United  States  the  benefit  of 
copyright  protection  on  substantially  the  same  basis  as 
to  its  own  dtizcns.** 

The  countries  with  which  these  treaty  relations  exist 
at  present  include  Belgium,  France,  Great  Britain  and 
her  possessions,  Switzerland,  Germany,  Italy,  Denmark, 
Portugal,  Spain,  Mexico,  Oiilc,  Costa  Rica,  Nether- 
lands and  her  possesions,  Cuba,  China,  Norway,  Japan 
(aid  Korea),  Austria,  Guatemala,  Salvador,  Honduras, 
Nicaragua,  Luxemburg,  Sweden,  Tunis  and  Hungary. 

Fkge  304 


m 

m 

1         W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

1   CmCAfiO                       HAMMOND  NEW 

Authors  or  publishers  who  are  citizens  of  the  above 
named  countries  may  obtain  copyright  in  the  United 
States  on  the  same  terms  as  authors  or  publishers  who 
are  citizens  of  the  United  States,  except  that  the  fee  is 
double. 

In  order  for  authors  or  publishers  in  the  United 
States  to  obtain  copyrights  in  the  above  mentioned  for- 
eign countries  it  is  necessary  to  obtain  only  the  Englidi 
copyright  in  addition  to  that  of  the  United  States.  These 
copyrights  protect  the  copyrighted  article  in  all  coun- 
tries with  which  the  United  States  has  copyright  rela- 
tions. 

The  expression  sometimes  seen  on  the  copyright  page 
"aU  rights  reserved,  including  that  of  translation  into 
foreign  languages,  including  the  Scandinavian,"  is  now 
valueless.  The  expression  came  into  use  during  the 
years  preceding  our  present  reciprocal  arrangements,  but 
is  now  discontinued. 

Engush  Copyright 

In  order  to  copyright  a  book  in  England  it  is  neces- 
sary to  publish  simultaneously  an  edition  of  such  book 
in  England;  the  difference  in  time  between  the  publica- 
tion in  England  and  America  must  not  exceed  fourteen 
days.  It  is  necessary  for  the  American  publisher  to 
have  an  English  agent  who  must  also  be  an  English  pub- 
lisher. On  the  day  appointed  for  publication,  sudi  Eng- 
lish agent  must  make  formal  sale  of  at  least  one  copy 

Page  205 


m 

V.       CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHKACO                    HMIMOMD                     NEIT IWK 

of  the  voltime,  and  the  entry  of  such  sale  must  appear 
upon  his  books. 

Six  copies  of  the  book  must  be  delivered  by  the  agent 
In  tlie  l<]ikiwii]g  libraries: 


British  Museum. 

Bodleian  Library — Oxford. 

University  Library — Cambridge. 

Library  of  the  Faculty  of  Advocates — Edinbur^. 

Library  of  Trinity  College — Dublin. 

National  Library  of  Wales. 

However,  it  is  not  obligatory  that  live  of  these  six 
copies  be  ddrvered  unless  demand  is  formally  made  with- 
in twdve  months  after  publication,  tnit  if  ^  books  are 
not  in  stock  for  ddivery,  then  the  agent  may  be  fined 
five  pounds,  plus  the  cost  of  the  volimie.  The  copy  for 
the  British  Musemn  must  be  delivered  within  one  month 
after  publication,  and  if  the  edition  is  in  de  luxe  form, 
the  copy  sent  to  tiie  British  Mnsenm  most  be  of  this 
edition. 

There  Is  no  necessity  for  printing  any  notice  of  Eng- 
lish copyright,  as  the  English  law  does  not  require  it; 
but  it  is  customary  on  American  books  copyrighted  in 
England  to  use  the  words,  "Copyright  in  England," 
to  give  warning  that  oopyrfgfat  is  claimed  on  the  book. 
It  is  not  considered  necessary  to  have  the  English  pub- 
lisher's in^rint  on  the  ti^  page  of  such  hocte. 


"WHAT  WILL  THE  JOB  COST  ME?" 

In  the  case  of  large  edition  printing  of  books,  catakigs, 
pamphlets,  etc,,  the  buyer  is  safe  in  assuming  that  the 
margin  of  profit,  by  reason  of  the  quantity,  is,  com- 
paratively speaking,  a  small  one.  Conceding  that  this 
margin  of  profit  must  exist,  the  price  quoted  on  any  job 
of  large  edition  printing  will  depend  largely  on  the  cost 
of  operation  and  production. 

This  cost,  by  reason  of  the  size  and  location  of  its 
plant,  its  splendid  equipment,  scientific  management,  and 
volume  of  business,  no  less  than  the  advantage  it  enjoys 
in  low  overhead  expense,  has  been  reduced  by  the 
W.  B.  Cbnkey  Company  to  a  degree  which  assures  to  all 
its  patrons  quality  printing  at  bed-rock  prices. 

In  estimating  cost,  however,  there  is  always  a  point 
below  which  it  is  possible  for  any  printing  house,  intent 
solely  on  "landing  the  job"  to  go,  but  the  result  is  likely 
to  prove  extremely  disappointing  to  the  buyer,  as  is 
usually  the  case  when  price  is  the  only  consideration  and 
quality  nowhere. 

Poor  printing  is  always  expensive.  Therefore,  while 
the  wise  buyer  will  buy  economically,  as  the  unsurpassed 
facilities  of  the  W.  B.  Conkey  Company  always  wii 
enable  him  to  do,  he  will  not  buy  printing  because  it  is 
cheap,^  regardless  of  quality.  In  every  job  of  printing, 
there  is  a  standard  of  service,  of  painstaking  workman- 
ship, as  well  as  of  material,  which  is  required  to  make 
the  job  effective,  from  the  buyer's  viewpoint.  In  buying 
printing,  this  viewpoint  is  most  important. 


m 


INDEX 


Abbreviations,  When  to  Use  62 

Ad  Interim  Copyright  202 

Amiqiie  Finished  Paper  ,  176 

Arrangement  of  Catalog  Contents   77 

Assignments  of  Copyrights   199 

Badong        ,  .  ,  ,  ,  ,  ,  ,  ,  ,  ,  ,  ,  ^  ^  ,  ,  ,  ,  153 

Ben  Dey  Process  Plates  89 

Ben  Dey  Shading  Tints  81 

Bindmg  for  Yonr  Book  .  67 

Bindings,  Leather  159 

Binders'  Board  ,  164 

Bock  Leather  161 

Bodoni,  8,  10  and  12  Point  127 

Bold  Face,  5ji,  6  and  8  Point  Type   123 

Bonds,  Ledgers  ams  Flat  WimifG  PAfus   .  180 

Bookbinding  143 

Bookbinding,  Special  Features  36 

Bookbinding,  Styles  of  157 

Bookbinding  Materials  158 

Book-building  and  Book- making    •  ......   ...  53 

Book  and  Catalog  Papers   175 

Book  Qoth^   158 

Book  Margins   .  165 

Book  Pressing  ,  156 

Book  Papers,  Sizes  and  Weights  of  179 

Book  Sviriog  lit 

Book  Siees  by  Name  168 

Brackets,  How  Used  .  62 

Buffing  162 

BmuuNG  A  Catalog  71 

Buildings  Described   20 

Buying  Faciltties  .••.«•....•••...«  46 


Calfskin   163 

^^rc  of  Plates  ...  ^9 

Capitalization  and  Spellkig   58 

Casing-in  of  Books  155 

Caslon  Na  3,  6,  8  and  10  Point  133 

Caslon  No.  3,  12  and  14  Point  .  134 

Caslon,  12  Point  Old  Style   122 

Catalog  Buiuiimg   •  .  •  •  69 

Page  208 


m 

W.  B.  CONKEY 

CHICAGO  HailMOND 

COMPANY 

NEW  YORK 

INDBX— Gontiamd 

Catalog  Binding   tj* 

Catalog  Papers    ...                          *    {Sf 

Catalog.  Size  of  .  .  .  .  J  ;  .*      ;    ;  [  ]  ;  ;  ; 

Cheltenhani  Old  Style.  ^  10  and  12  Point  130 

Uoth  for  Bookbinding   iS 

Cloth  Joined  End  Shicts  .  .  .  ,c? 

Coated  Paper  m 

Color  Plates.  Process   o? 

Color  Plates.  Zinc    ....  % 

OAoT  Printing,  Economical  Method  \  '.      I  [  [  ]   I  [  [  140 

tjCMiatii!^  140 

CoiMarative  Sizes  and  Weights,  Bonds,  Ledgm'  and '  * 

Writings  7*, 

Comparative  Weights  of  Book  Papers   .                '   '  '  190 

Comparisons  in  Quality  and  Price  of  Leather  '.  [    "  '  *  164 

Composition,  How  Handled   28 

Composition.  How  to  Esttmate  >  I  [  m 

Conkey  Organization                                            •  •   •  »w 

Content  Arrangement  of  Books  fig 

Content  Arrangement  of  Catalog  .  .  '  '  '  '  '  ZS 
Convenient  Table  for  Figuring  Stock  .'.*.' isg 

Contributions  to  Periodicals,  Copyright                   I  .  m 

"j^  ~z  -i-ayout   

Com  lueparation  of  [  [ 2 

Copyrights,  How  Obtained  ...                         '  '  105 

Copyright  Assignment  *  .*''*"''  199 

Copyright  Convention  of  the  Pan-American  RcpubUcs  and 

the  United  States  

Copyright,  English   '  SS 

Copyrights,  International  ...             '  SS 

Copyrighting  Books  Published  Abroad             \  '  m 

Copyrirfitmg  Contributions  to  Periodicals   .   .  '   '  m 

Copyright  m  Pan-American  Countries  !   .*  *   "  203 

Copyright  of  Periodicals   Ml 

Correcting  Proof   fVi 

Cost  of  the  Job   •  • 

Cover  Paper,  How  to  Select \  '  ' 

GuvER  Stock  ..........  iS 

Covers,  Glued-on  ]  *  ' *  '  "  ilo 

Gitnlnff  «nd  Fadm^'  Bonds,'  Ledgera  and  Writings'  .*  .'  184 

VMgc  209 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

MEW  YORK 


INDEX— Continued 

Dimensions  of  a  Cut,  How  to  Determine  94 

Do's  and  Don'ts  in  Type  Selections   103 

Drying  and  Finishing  Bonds,  Ledgers  and  Writings  .  .  .  183 

Dull  Coated  Paper  178 

Dnratioa  of  Copyright  196 

Eggsfadl  Finish  Vwper   176 

Electrotjrpes  93 

Electrotyping,  How  Done  28 

^^nij    tie  ••>••••••••«••..••«•  105 

Embossing  154 

Ems  in  One  Pound  of  Type  Matter,  Various  Sizes  ....  108 
Ems  to  the  Running  Inch  in  Columns  of  Various  Widths  .  109 

Ems  to  Line  Standard  Book  Measure  Ill 

Ems  in  Square  laches  of  Various  Sizes  of  Type  ....  110 

Enameled  Fiipcr  178 

End  Sheets   .  150 

End  Sheets,  Cloth  Joined  151 

English  Finish  Paper  177 

English  Coimight  Z& 

Estimating  Composition   107 

Estimating  Ems  in  Copy  108 

Esthnating  Quantity  of  Stock   186 

Figures,  When  to  Use  63 

Finishes  of  Half-tones  86 

Fire,  Insurance  Against   47 

Folding  Printed  Sheets  147 

Full  L«aw  Sheep   •  .  «..•*...•••••••  161 

Giathering  and  CoHatwy   148 

Genuine  Seal   163 

Glued-on  Covers  149 

Qossary  on  Bookhmding  .....•••«.....  166 

Gold,  Marbled  and  Stained  Edges  154 

Gnmnd  Wood  Pttlp  ••«..•••••••...•  172 

Half-tone  Process  ..85 

Half-tone  Finishes    ..•..••...«•.•   83,  86 

Half-tone  Screens  82^  85 

Half-tones,  21inc  .......•••87 

Handlmg  JPwftt  Stock  ...•••••••■••.•26 

Headbanding  wd  TiMiiHg  ..«•••.••••«•••  153 

310 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 

CHICAGO  HAmiOIID  NEW  WIK 


INDEX— Continued 

How  to  Determine  the  Dimensions  of  a  Cut  94 

How  to  Estimate  Quantity  of  Stock  Required  186 

How  to  Find  Weights  of  Faper  .  187 

How  to  Measure  Type  105 

How  to  Obtain  Copyri^ts  195 

Illustrations  79 

Illustrations,  Preparation  of  !  !  68 

Imitation  Leather  isg 

Imitation  Morocco  Sheep   1611 

Index,  Preparation  of  68 

Indexing,  Thumb  155 

Inspection  of  Books   .  ,  .  154 

Insurant  Special  Feature  47 

International  Copyrights   204 

Italics   64 

Kind  of  Paper  to  Use  in  Catalogs  •   .  75 

Laid  Finish  Paper   176 

Layout  and  Copy   72 

Layout,  Diagram  73 

LITRES  Bindings  .159 

Ledger  Papers   I      .  180 

Length  of  Line  and  Sire  of  Type  I  !  104 

Lines  in  1000  Ems  HI 

lining  of  Books  •   .  153 

Literary  Style  55 

Location  of  Works   19 

Lockup  Room   .  .  !  33 

Machine  Finish  Paper   .177 

Mailmg  Facihties  ;  45 

Making  Type  Talk   100 

Marbled  and  Stained  Edges  154 

Margins  «   .  165 

61 

Measuring  Standard  Book  Composition  ........  HI 

 105 

Mitscherhch  Pulp  173 

Modem  Type  Faces  123 

Ntckd-sted  Tyi>es   93 

Notke  of  Copyrii^t  I  196 

21s 


m 


I 


Nou  16,  10  Point  Type  128 

Nitaibcr  of  Words  in  1^  fins  Set  in  Various  Sies  .  .  lOB 

OM  Stfle  Type  Faces  118 

Oo«e  Calf  163 

Ooze  Sheep   161 

Opacity  Paper  177 

Order  of  Content  Arrangement  in  Books  68 

^  .         pijm   S2 


Pamphlet,  Catalog  and  Bookbinding  143 

Pamphlet  Binding  149 

Paper  Finishes  ^  Name  176 

Paper- MAKING  169 

Paper  Stocks,  How  Handled  ............  26 

mer  Stock,  Hoar  to  Select   .  66 

Paper  Trade  Customs  .185 

Parchment  and  Onionskin  Papers  185 

Periodical,  Copyright  .201 

Pyca,  .'^'^'e  ...  105 

X  IgSKUl  ...  163 

Plates,  Care  of  29 

Plate  Room  30 

P<Mnt  ^rstem  of  Measuring  Type  105 

Power  Used   44 

Preparation  of  Copy  56 

Preparation  of  Index  68 

PaiimNG  *  135 

Pressroom  .34 

Process  Color  Plates  87 

Process  of  Work  through  Plant  .  26 

Proof  Corrections   114 

Ptaof-rcaders'  Marks   ...............  112 

Protection  of  Titles   199 

Pulp  and  Paper-making  169 

Punctuation  58 

Quotations  58 

Recording  Assignments  of  Copyright  199 

Recording  Fees  for  Copyright  200 

Redprocsd  Copyright  Arrangements  with  Foreign  Countries  203 
~  212 


W.  B.  CONKEY  COMPANY 
cmcico  HAimoND  NEir 


INDBX-^ontinned 

Reinforcing  First  and  Last  Forms   ....  150 

Relation  Between  Size  of  Type  and  Length  of  Line   .'  !  104 

Relative  Sizes  of  Type  in  Ems   109 

Roans   *  161 

Rounding  and  Backing  153 

Routme  of  Work  through  Plant    26 

Rules  on  Punctuation   58 

Scotch  Roman,  12  Pomt  Type   129 

Screens  for  Half-tones  ....  07 

Selecting  the  Binding  for  Your  B^ok  I  I  I      I  I  [  S 

Selecting  the  Cover  Paper   75 

Selecting  Paper  Stock  for  Your  Book  ^                I  66 

Selecting  Type  Face  for  Your  Book   65 

Selecting  Type  Faces,  General  Rules   ,  103 

bize  of  Catalog   71 

Sizing  of  Bonds,  Ledgers  and  WiimifG  Papiis  '!  *  *  *  183 

Sizes  and  Weights  of  Book  Paper  ....  *   '  179 

Skiver   j^j 

Snmshing  and  Trimming  .  .  .      !  "  !         !  I  !  *  152 

Soda  Pulp  

Special  Information    ....  I  *  "  " 103 

Specimen  Pages  for  Catalog  ^ 

SnciMEN  Type  Pages   115 

Specimen  Zinc  Etchings 

Split  Sheep   .....  j?T 

Square  Inches  in  1.000  Ems,  Set  in  Various  Sizis  of'T™  .*  108 

o.  ck  o.  L.  Paper   ^yy 

Stained  Edges   1// 

Stamping  and  Embossing  ^  .  .  I  I  I            I  I  [  ]  ,  iS4 

dteeltypes  

i«e^^^!"*:^ : :  :::::::| 

iSllial^^^p^^^^^  -j; 

Sulphite  Pulp  I  I  I  Im 

Tapes                                                            '  1K9 

The  Em  I  iM 

The  Message .........  I  1  *  [ 7? 

Thumb  Indeijng                          I  I  I  I  ^  ^  ^  *  '  155 


m 


The  Flea  105 

Tint  Plates  90 

Titles,  Protection  of   199 

Tide  No.  2,  8  Point  Type  132 

Trade  Customs,  Universal  Paper  185 

Trimmmg  of  Bookt  152 

Tjrpographical  Slyle   •  57 

Typography   97 

Type  Face  for  Your  Book   65 

Type  Measuremeiit  •  ....  105 

Ttm  SpEaMENs 

8  Point  Old  Style   118 

9  Point  Old  Style   119 

10  Point  Old  Style  120 

11  Point  Old  Style  ...............  120 

12  Point  Old  Style   122 

8  Point  Modem   .  123 

9  Point  Modern  124 

10  Point  Modern   125 

11  Point  Modern  125 

8.  10  and  12  Point  Bodoni  127 

10  Point  No.  16,  Full  Page  128 

12  Pbint  Scotch  Rofnaii,  Putt  Page  .  129 

8k  10  and  12  Point  Cheltenham  130 

8  and  10  Point  Cheltenhanv  Wide  132 

8  Point  Tide  132 

6,  8  and  10  Point  Gulon  Na  S  .........  133 

12  and  14  KbA  Oaim  Na  3  134 

Unimsal  Bnper  Trade  Otstonis   .  185 

Welfare  Among  Employees  .•«....  SO 

What  Will  the  Job  Coit?  207 

When  to  Use  Figufes  •  •  63 

AAAood  Cuts   .•.••............«.  90 

Wood  Pulps  171 

Words  in  1000  Ems  ^  108 

WiMrds  ill  llie  Somure  Indi  ...•••.•••«..  Ill 

■mmi  jTmnMm     ••...*.«•.•»••••.  lOV 

Sne  Cidor  Platet  •  •  •  •   .  88 

Zinc  Etchings   .  89 

Zmc  Half  "tones    •••«••••••••••  87 

314 


COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES 

iMi  iMMdi  it  dm  on  tlM  dailPlilkss^  below,  or  at  the 
o^iinillfHi  of  m  period  allar  the  date  of  borrowing,  as 

ffOfvidod  1^  'fUm  ndm  of  the  library  or  bgr  special  arrange- 
ment with  Hw  Itenta  In 


DATE  DUK 


DATS  •OimOWKD 


DATE  OUK 


fcaov  about  printing  and  'book- 
.  ^.  yaklng  _ 


I 


,4,  655«S 

1^  ■  ■ 


ft" 


2  J  192? 


